NC0071323_Application (ATC)_20211129

mcgill Shaping Communities Together
November 23, 2021
Ms. Min Xiao, PE �� r1� /ED
North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality '"�•'•'"�1 �/
NPDES Complex Permitting
512 North Salisbury Street (9th Floor Archdale Building) 9 20��,
Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
NCDEQIDWRINPDa
Re: Request for Authorization to Construct
Etowah Sewer Company Wastewater System Improvements
Central States Water Resources, Inc.
Henderson County, North Carolina
Dear Ms. Xiao,
Central States Water Resources, Inc. (CSWR) hereby requests Authorization to Construct the
referenced facility and treatment process modifications as described in the enclosed plans,
specifications, and other supporting documents. This submittal includes one hard copy and one
digital copy of the following:
• Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(Form ATC-12-14)
• Current NPDES Permit(NC0071323)
• Engineering Plans
• Engineering Specifications
• Engineering Calculations
• Two CDs
Please contact me if you have any questions or require any additional information.
Sincerely,
McGill Associates, PA
Nelson Heringer, PE
Project Engineer
Enclosure
Cc: MJ Chen, PE McGill Associates
Josiah Cox, Central States Water Resources
Jake Freeman, PE, Central States Water Resources
MCGILL ASSOCIATES 55 BROAD STREET,ASHEVILLE, NC 28801/828.252.0575/MCGILLASSOCIATES.COM

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONM&NT AL QUAEI,. APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION
A. The Division of Water Resources will accept this application package for review only if all of the items are provided and the
application is complete.Failure to submit all of the required items will result in the application package being returned as incomplete
per 15A NCAC 02T.0105(bl.
B. Plans and specifications must be prepared in accordance with 15 NCAC 02H.0100,15A NCAC 02T,North Carolina General Statute
133-3, North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES
Wastewater Treatment Facilities.
C. The plans and specifications submitted must represent a completed final design that is ready to advertise for bid.
D. Any content changes made to this Form ATC-12-14 shall result in the application package being returned.
E. The Applicant shall submit ONE ORIGINAL and ONE DIGITAL COPY (CD) of the application, all supporting documentation and
attachments. All information must be submitted bound or in a 3-ring binder, with a Section tab for each Section, except the
Engineering Plans.
F. Check the boxes below to indicate that the information is provided and the requirements are met.
G. If attachments are necessary for clarity or due to space limitations, such attachments are considered part of the application
package and must be numbered to correspond to the item referenced.
H. For any project that requires review under the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), an Authorization to Construct cannot be
issued prior to the completion of a State Clearinghouse advertisement period for a FONSI,EIS,etc.unless the project qualifies for
a Determination of Minor Construction Activity.
I. For more information,visit the Division of Water Resources web site at:https://deq.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/water-
resources-permits/wastewater-branch/npdes-wastewater/authorization-to-construct.
J. In addition to this Authorization to Construct,the Applicant should be aware that other permits may be required from other Sections
of the Division of Water Resources(for example: reclaimed water facilities permits;Class A or B biosolids residuals permit).
SECTION 2: APPLICANT INFORMATION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. APPLICANT �0� 2 9 IUZl
Applicant's name Central States Water Resources, Inc. {
Signature authority's name per 15A NCAC 02T.0106(b) Josiah Cox NCDEOID'/ FONe JCS
Signature authority's title President
Complete mailing address 1650 Des Peres Road,Suite 303,St.Louis,MO 63131
Telephone number [phone]
Email address [e-mail]
B. PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's name Nelson Heringer, P.E.
Professional Engineer's title Project Engineer
North Carolina Professional Engineer's License No. 050993
Firm name McGill Associates, PA
Firm License number C-0459
Complete mailing address 55 Broad Street,Asheville, NC 28801
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 1

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL OUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
Telephone number [phone]
Email address [e-mail]
C. NPDES PERMIT
NPDES Permit number NC0071323
Current Permitted flow(MGD)—include permit
flow phases if applicable 0.125
D. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Provide a brief description of the project:
The proposed project generally includes the replacement of the two existing pumps at the influent pump station,replacement of
the top section of the influent pump station wet well, replacement of vents, and replacement of the chlorination/dechlorination
tablet feed system with a UV disinfection system(channel style bulbs).The project also includes the addition of an influent static
screen upstream of the EQ basin and upgrades to the six lift stations.
SECTION 3: APPLICATION ITEMS REQUIRED FOR SUBMITTAL FOR ALL PROJECTS
A. Cover Letter
® The letter must include a request for the Authorization to Construct;the facility NPDES Number;a brief project description
that indicates whether the project is a new facility,facility modification,treatment process modification,or facility expansion;
the construction timeline;and a list of all items and attachments included in the application package.
® If any of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-3, North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities are not met by the proposed design,the letter must include an itemized list of the requirements that are not met.
B. NPDES Permit
® Submit Part I of the Final NPDES permit for this facility that includes Part A(Effluent Limitations and Monitoring Requirements)
for the monthly average flow limit that corresponds to the work that is requested for this project.
C. Special Order by Consent
❑ If the facility is subject to any Special Orders by Consent(SOC),submit the applicable SOC.
Z Not Applicable.
D. Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision
❑ Submit a copy of the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision for this project.
❑ Provide a brief description of any of the mitigating factors or activities included in the approved Environmental Document
that impact any aspect of design of this project, if not specified in the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision.
® Not Applicable.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 2

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
NVkONN1LNIAL QUAL' APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
E. Engineering Plans
® Per 1SA NCAC 02T .0504(c)(11,submit one set of detailed plans that have been signed,sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
® Per 21 NCAC 56.1103(a)(6),the name,address and License number of the Licensee's firm shall be included on each sheet of
the engineering drawings.
® Plans must be labeled as follows:FINAL DRAWING—FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY—NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
El 15A NCAC 02H .0124 requires multiple (dual at a minimum) components such as pumps, chemical feed systems, aeration
equipment and disinfection equipment. Is this requirement met by the design? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, provide an
explanation:
Plans shall include:
® Plans for ail applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project(check as appropriate):
® Civil ❑ Not Applicable
® Process Mechanical ❑ Not Applicable
® Structural ❑Not Applicable
® Electrical ❑Not Applicable
® Instrumentation/Controls ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Architectural ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Mechanical ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Plumbing ® Not Applicable
® Plan and profile views and associated details of all modified treatment units including piping,valves,and equipment(pumps,
blowers, mixers,diffusers,etc.)
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the hydraulic profile of the treatment facility?®Yes or❑ No. If yes, provide
a hydraulic profile drawing on one sheet that includes all impacted upstream and downstream units. The profile shall include
the top of wall elevations of each impacted treatment unit and the water surface elevations within each impacted treatment
unit for two flow conditions: (1) the NPDES permitted flow with all trains in service and (2) the peak hourly flow with one
treatment train removed from service.
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the process flow diagram or process flow schematic of the treatment facility?
®Yes or❑No. If yes,provide the process flow diagram or process flow schematic showing all modified flow paths including
aeration,recycle/return,wasting,and chemical feed,with the location of all monitoring and control instruments noted.
F. ® Engineering Specifications
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(2),submit one set of specifications that have been signed,sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
® Specifications must be labeled as follows: FINAL SPECIFICATIONS — FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY — NOT RELEASED FOR
CONSTRUCTION.
Specifications shall include:
® Specifications for all applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project (check as
appropriate):
® Civil ❑ Not Applicable
® Process Mechanical ❑ Not Applicable
® Structural ❑ Not Applicable
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 3

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
® Electrical ❑ Not Applicable
® Instrumentation/Controls ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Architectural ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Mechanical ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Plumbing ® Not Applicable
® Detailed specifications for all treatment units and processes including piping, valves, equipment (pumps, blowers, mixers,
diffusers,etc.),and instrumentation.
® Means of ensuring quality and integrity of the finished product including leakage testing requirements for structures and
pipelines,and performance testing requirements for equipment.
® Bid Form for publicly bid projects.
G. Construction Sequence Plan
® Construction Sequence Plan such that construction activities will not result in overflows or bypasses to waters of the State.
The Plan must not imply that the Contractor is responsible for operation of treatment facilities. List the location of the
Construction Sequence Plan as in the Engineering Plans or in the Engineering Specifications or in both: Located in Section
011000 Summary
H. Engineering Calculations
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(3),submit one set of engineering calculations that have been signed,sealed and dated by a North
Carolina Licensed Professional Engineer;the seal,signature and date shall be placed on the cover sheet of the calculations.
For new or expanding facilities and for treatment process modifications that are included in Section 4.C,the calculations shall
include at a minimum:
® Demonstration of how peak hour design flow was determined with a justification of the selected peaking factor.
® Influent pollutant loading demonstrating how the design influent characteristics in Section 4.B.2 of this form were
determined.
® Pollutant loading for each treatment unit demonstrating how the design effluent concentrations in Section 4.B.2 of this form
were determined.
® Hydraulic loading for each treatment unit.
® Sizing criteria for each treatment unit and associated equipment(blowers,mixers, pumps,etc.)
® Total dynamic head(TDH)calculations and system curve analysis for each pump specified that is included in Section 4.C.6.
® Buoyancy calculations for all below grade structures.
® Supporting documentation that the specified auxiliary power source is capable of powering all essential treatment units.
I. Permits
® Provide the following information for each permit and/or certification required for this project:
Permit/ If Not Issued Provide
Not Date Date Certification Status and Expected
Permit/Certification Applicable Submitted Approved Number Issuance Date
Dam Safety N/A
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control N/A
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 4

f I
•
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENT L OUAL r APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
USCOE /Section 404 Permit N/A
Water Quality Certification(4011 N/A
USCOE/Section 10 N/A
Stormwater Management Plan N/A
CAMA N/A
NCDOT Encroachment Agreement N/A
Railroad Encroachment Agreement N/A
Other: N/A N/A
J. Residuals Management Plan
❑ For all new facilities, expanding facilities, or modifications that result in a change to sludge production and/or sludge
processes, provide a Residuals Management Plan meeting the requirements of 1SA NCAC 02T .0504(j) and 15A NCAC 02T
.0508;the Plan must include:
❑ A detailed explanation as to how the generated residuals(including trash,sediment and grit)will be collected,handled,
processed,stored,treated,and disposed.
❑ An evaluation of the treatment facility's residuals storage requirements based upon the maximum anticipated residuals
production rate and ability to remove residuals.
❑ A permit for residuals utilization or a written commitment to the Applicant from a Permittee of a Department approved
residuals disposal/utilization program that has adequate permitted capacity to accept the residuals or has submitted a
residuals/utilization program application.
❑ If oil,grease,grit or screenings removal and collection is a designated unit process, a detailed explanation as to how the
oil/grease will be collected, handled, processed,stored and disposed.
® Not Applicable.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 5

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 4: PROJECT INFORMATION
A. WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT FLOW INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES
1. Provide the following flow information: Not Applicable
Plant Flows
Existing Plant Design MGD
Current NPDES Permit Limit MGD
Current Annual Average
(past 12 months) MGD
For Past 12 Months: For Past 24 Months:
Start Date:month/yr Start Date:month/yr
End Date:month/yr End Date:month/yr
Maximum Month MGD MGD
Maximum Day MGD MGD
Peak Hour MGD MGD
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 6

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
B. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DESIGN INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES AND
FOR TREATMENT PROCESS MODIFICATIONS
1. Have all of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H.0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-3,North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1,and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities been met by the proposed design and specifications?®Yes or Q No. If no, provide justification as to why the
requirements are not met,consistent with 15A NCAC 02T.0105(n):
2. Provide the design influent and effluent characteristics that are used as the basis for the project design,and the NPDES
permit limits for the following parameters:
Project Basis of Design
Design Influent Design Influent
Influent Concentration Load
Concentration- (Must be (Must be
Current Annual supported by supported by
Average(past Engineering Engineering Design Effluent
12 months)if Calculations Calculations Concentration and/or NPDES Permit Limits
Parameter Available [Section 3.H Load (monthly average)
_-. �) [Section 3.H])
Ammonia Nitrogen N/A mg/L Summer N/A mg/L Summer
(NH3-N)
N/A mg/L N/A mg/L N/A lb/day
N/A mg/L Winter N/A mg/L Winter
Biochemical N/A mg/L Summer N/A mg/L Summer
Oxygen Demand N/A mg/L N/A mg/L N/A lb/day
(BOD5) N/A mg/L Winter N/A mg/L Winter
Fecal Coliform 400 per 100 mL 200 per 100 mL
Nitrate+Nitrite
Nitrogen(NO3-N+ N/A mg/L N/A mg/L
N O2-N)
Total Kjeldahl N/A mg/L
Nitrogen
N/A mg/L N/A mg/L
Total Nitrogen
N/A lb/year N/A lb/year
N/A mg/L N/A mg/L
Total Phosphorus N/A mg/L N/A mg/L N/A lb/day
N/A lb/year N/A lb/year
Total Suspended N/A mg/L N/A mg/L N/A lb/day N/A mg/L N/A mg/L
Solids(TSS)
3. Based on the"Project Basis of Design"parameters listed above,will the proposed design allow the treatment facility to
meet the NPDES Permit Limits listed above?®Yes or❑ No. If no, describe how and why the Permit Limits will not be
met:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 7
IL

P
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
4. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(i), by-pass and overflow lines are prohibited. Is this condition met by the design?®Yes or❑ No
If no,describe the treatment units bypassed,why this is necessary,and where the bypass discharges:
5. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(k),multiple pumps shall be provided wherever pumps are used. Is this condition met by the
design?®Yes or❑ No. If no,provide an explanation:
6. Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(11, power reliability shall be provided consisting of automatically activated standby power supply
onsite capable of powering all essential treatment units under design conditions,or dual power supply shall be provided
per 1SA NCAC 02H.0124(2)(aj. Is this condition met by the design? ®Yes or❑ No. If no,provide(as an attachment
to this Application)written approval from the Director that the facility:
➢ Has a private water supply that automatically shuts off during power failures and does not contain elevated water
storage tanks,and
➢ Has sufficient storage capacity that no potential for overflow exists,and
➢ Can tolerate septic wastewater due to prolonged detention.
7. Per 1SA NCAC 02T.0505(o),a minimum of 30 days of residual storage shall be provided. Is this condition met by the
design? ®Yes or❑ No. If no,explain the alternative design criteria proposed for this project in accordance 15A NCAC
02T.105(n):
8. Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(q),the public shall be prohibited from access to the wastewater treatment facilities. Explain how
the design complies with this requirement:The site will be enclosed by existing security fencing.
9. Is the treatment facility located within the 100-year flood plain? ®Yes or❑ No. If yes,describe how the facility is
protected from the 100-year flood:All treatment units and electrical equipment are constructed above the elevation of the
100-year flood.
C. WASTEWATER TREATMENT UNIT AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR
EXPANDING FACILITIES AND FOR MODIFIED TREATMENT UNITS
1. PRELIMINARY AND PRIMARY TREATMENT(i.e.,physical removal operations and flow equalization):
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Provided?
Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
Manual Bar Screen 1 Static Screen 0.100 mm opening size,0.468 M-102 412656 Yes
MGD at peak hourly flow
Mechanical Bar
N/A MGD at peak hourly flow
Screen
Grit Removal N/A MGD at peak hourly flow
Flow Equalization N/A gallons
ft diameter; ft side
Primary Clarifier N/A Circular water depth
Primary Clarifier N/A Rectangular square feet; ft side
water depth _
Other f
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 8

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
2. SECONDARY TREATMENT(BIOLOGICAL REACTORS AND CLARIFIERS)(i.e.,biological and chemical processes to remove
organics and nutrients)Not AppIR able
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Provided?
Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
Aerobic Zones/ N/A gallons
Tanks
Anoxic Zones/ N/A gallons
Tanks
Anaerobic N/A
Zones/Tanks gallons
Sequencing Batch N/A gallons
Reactor(SBR)
Membrane N/A
Bioreactor(MBR) gallons
Secondary Clarifier N/A ft diameter; ft
side water depth
Secondary Clarifier N/A square feet; ft
side water depth
Other N/A
3. TERTIARY TREATMENT Not Applii,ible
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Type Size per Unit Provided?
Units Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
Tertiary Clarifier N/A Circular ft diameter; ft
side water depth
Tertiary Clarifier N/A Rectangular square feet; ft
side water depth
Tertiary Filter N/A square feet
Tertiary Membrane N/A square feet
Filtration
Post-Treatment N/A gallons
Flow Equalization
Post-Aeration N/A gallons
Other N/A
4. DISINFECTION
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Type Size per Unit Provided?
Units Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
312,500 gal/day per bank at Yes
Ultraviolet Light 2 In Series peak hourly flow;2 banks; 16 M-104 466600
lamps/bank
N/A (Gas; gallons of contact
Chlorination tablet;liquid) tank/unit
Dechlorination N/A (Gas; gallons of contact
tablet;liquid) tank/unit
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 9

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
5. RESIDUALS TREATMENT Not Applicable
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Provided?
Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
Gravity Thickening N/A square feet; ft side
Tank water depth
Mechanical N/A
Thickening/ dry lb/hour
Dewatering
Aerobic Digestion N/A gallons
Anaerobic N/A gallons
Digestion
Composting N/A dry lb/hour
Drying N/A dry lb/hour
Other N/A
6. PUMP SYSTEMS(include influent,intermediate,effluent,major recycles,waste sludge,thickened waste sludge and plant
drain pumps)
No.of Capacity of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Purpose Type each pump
Pumps GPM TDH Reference Reference
Influent Pump Lift wastewater into Submersible Solids
2 313 43 M-101 223120
Station EQ tank Handling Pumps
7. MIXERS Not Applicable
No.of Power of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Mixers Purpose Type each(HP)
Mixer Reference Reference
8. BLOWERS Not Applicable
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 10

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL OUALITv APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
Capacity of
Location No.of Purpose Type each Blower Plan Sheet Specification
Blowers (CFM) Reference Reference
9. ODOR CONTROL`,ot Applicable
No.of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Units Purpose Type Reference Reference
D. SETBACKS—COMPLETE FOR NEW WASTEWATER TREATMENT STRUCTURES
1. The minimum distance for each setback parameter to the wastewater treatment/storage units per 15A NCAC 02T .0506(b)
are as follows:
Minimum Distance Is Minimum Distance
Required from Nearest Requirement met by the
Setback Parameter Design?If"No",identify
Treatment/Storage
Unit Setback Waivers in Item D.2
Below
Any habitable residence or
place of assembly under
separate ownership or not 100 ft ®Yes ❑No
to be maintained as part
of the project site
Any private or public 100 ft ®Yes ❑No
water supply source
Surface waters(streams—
intermittent and
perennial, perennial 50ft ®Yes ❑ No
waterbodies,and
wetlands)
Any well with exception of 1
monitoring wells 100 ft ®Yes ❑ No
Any property line 50 ft ®Yes ❑ No
2. Have any setback waivers been obtained per 15A NCAC 02T .0506(dl? ❑ Yes or ® No. If yes, have these waivers been
written, notarized and signed by all parties involved and recorded with the County Register of Deeds? ❑ Yes or❑ No. If
no, provide an explanation:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 11

State of North Carolina
`7* Department of Environmental Quality
•
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
LNVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 5: APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T.0105:
I, Nelson B.Heringer,attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Professional Engineer)
for the Etowah WWTP Improvements
(Facility and Project Name)
was prepared under my direct supervisory control and to the best of my knowledge is accurate,complete and consistent
with the information supplied in the engineering plans, specifications, calculations, and all other supporting
documentation for this project. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the proposed design has been
prepared in accordance with all applicable regulations and statutes, 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 1SA NCAC 02T, North Carolina
General Statute 133-3, North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design
Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment Facilities, and this Authorization to Construct Permit Application, except as
provided for and explained in Section 4.B.1 of this Application. I understand that the Division of Water Resources'
issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based solely upon this Certification and that the Division may
waive the technical review of the plans, specifications, calculations and other supporting documentation provided in this
application package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit by the Division.
Although certain portions of this submittal package may have been prepared, signed and sealed by other professionals
licensed in North Carolina, inclusion of these materials under my signature and seal signifies that I have reviewed the
materials and have determined that the materials are consistent with the project design.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6B,any person who knowingly makes
any false statement, representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000, as well as civil penalties up to $25,000 per violation.
North Carolina Professional Engineer's seal with written signature placed over or adjacent to the seal and dated:
�iriurrtliir,
%.\ C A Ro"'
oc Es St
9 `
050993 j
N. F 1111..1.4
�f 4'"00 . N���,\;
0\0
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 12

•
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 6:APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY APPLICANT
Applicant's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T.0106(b]:
I, Josiah Cox, President of CSWR, attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Signature Authority and Title)
for the Etowah WWTP Improvements
(Facility and Project Name)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I also understand that if all
required parts of this application package are not completed and that if all required supporting information and
attachments are not included,this application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I further certify that in
accordance with 1SA NCAC 02T .0120(b1,the Applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of environmental crimes,
has not abandoned a wastewater facility without proper closure, does not have an outstanding civil penalty where all
appeals have been abandoned or exhausted,are compliant with any active compliance schedule, and does not have any
overdue annual fees.
I understand that the Division of Water Resources' issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based
solely upon acceptance of the Licensed Professional Engineer's Certification contained in Section 5, and that the Division
may waive the technical review of the plans,specifications,calculations and other supporting documentation provided
in this application package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6B any person who knowingly makes
any false stat ent, representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may incl de a fin of to xceed $10,000, as well as civil penalties up to$25,000 per violation.
Signature: Date: I I /2 3/2 02 I
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES/NPDES
By U.S. Postal Service By Courier/Special Delivery:
1617 MAIL SERVICE CENTER 512 N. SALISBURY STREET,9TH FLOOR
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617 RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 13

/ DESIGN CALCULATIONS
TOWN OF ETOWAH
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
IMPROVEMENTS
HENDERSON COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
J
mcgill
Shaping
Communities
Together
55 Broad Street
Asheville NC, 28801 `` ,iun++rrr,r���
828-252-0575 Aszi1..‘•‘/c)5
$$ Y1 C A R0 ESSi.4, 1',k
Firm License No.: C-0459 ,� 9
050993 '
NOVEMBER 2021 %?S, NGiNE�� 4 `�
PROJECT NO. 21.00317 //�,„?iv B.
v4i.C\�,, `�

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DESIGN PARAMETERS
2. HYDRAULIC PROFILE
3. PUMP STATIONS
4. HEADWORKS AND PRIMARY TREATMENT
5. DISINFECTION
APPENDICES
A. PROCESS EQUIPMENT INFORMATION
B. HYDRAULIC PROFILE CALCULATIONS
Town of Etowah Page 2 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

SECTION 1 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Design Average Daily Flow(ADF)= 125,000 gpd(per current NPDES permit)
Design Peak Hourly Flow(PHF)=Peaking Factor x ADF
P=population=398 residential customers * 3 persons per home= 1194 persons
1194
Qphf = 18 + ,IP 18 + V1,000
Peaking Factor,PF = =
= 3.75
QADF 4 + /P
4 + J1,0011940
Design PHF = 3.75 * 125,000 gpd = 450,000 gpd
Town of Etowah Page 3 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

SECTION 2 HYDRAULIC PROFILE
The only changes to the plant hydraulic profile occur at the effluent of Treatment Units No. 1 and No.
2 with the addition of a UV disinfection unit. This plant upgrade does not propose to increase the
capacity of any existing portion of the facility. For these reasons,calculations will only address these
sections. Hydraulic profile calculations have been included within Appendix B.
Town of Etowah Page 4 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

SECTION 3 INFLUENT PUMP STATION
The proposed influent pumps move raw wastewater from the sanitary sewer collection system to the
influent of the proposed static screen. The pumps will be installed within an existing 5' diameter
precast concrete wet well that will be rehabilitated with a new hatch and top section. Wet well pump
on and pump off elevations,have been selected by the designer.The discharge elevation is determined
by the proposed elevation of the discharge into the static screen.
Each of the two pumps is specified to flow 450,000 gpd operating alone, with VFDs proposed to
match the design average of 125,000 gpd.With two pumps installed,the firm capacity of the influent
pump station will be 450,000 gpd or 325 gpm.
Peak Average
Minimum Water Level 2078.00 2078.00 ft MSL
Water Level in Static Screen 2114.22 2114.12 ft MSL
Static Head 36.22 36.12 ft
Pipe Length 25.00 25.00 ft
Pipe Diameter 4.30 4.30 in
0.450 0.125 mgd
E Flow 313 87 gpm
L 0.70 0.19 cfs
C 125.00 125.00
a,
r+ Friction Loss 1.17 0.11 ft
v
a Velocity 6.90 1.92 fps
K 3.88 3.88
fitting loss 2.87 0.22 ft
TDH 4.04 0.33 ft
Pipe Length 53.00 53.00 ft
Pipe Diameter 4.30 4.30 in
0.45 0.13 mgd
_°a Flow 313 87 gpm
E 0.70 0.19 cfs
8 C 125.00 125.00
v Friction Loss 2.48 0.23 ft
E. Velocity 6.90 1.92 fps
K 3.39 3.39
fitting loss 2.51 0.19 ft
TDH 4.99 0.43 ft
Pump TDH 45.25 36.88 ft
Pump Efficiency 50% 50%
Pump Horsepower 7.20 1.63 hp
Town of Etowah Page 5 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

Riser within Wet Combined Force
Well (each pump) Main to Screen
Component or Fitting KL Number Total Number Total
Tee, Flanged, Dividing Line Flow 0.20 1 0.2
Tee, Flanged, Dividing Branched Flow 1.00 0 0
Wye 0.20
Reducing Base Elbow 1.00
Elbow, Flanged Regular 90° 0.30 2 0.6 2 0.6
Elbow, Flanged Regular 45° 0.35 1 0.35 2 0.7
Elbow, Flanged 22.5° 0.20
Butterfly Valve, Fully Open 1.62
Angle Valve, Fully Open 2.00
Plug Valve, Fully Open 0.23 1 0.23 3 0.69
Swing Check Valve, Forward Flow 2.00 1 2
Pipe Entrance 0.50 1 0.5
Reducer 0.20 1 0.2 1 0.2
Secondary Clarifier Center Column 1.50
mud valve 2.50
sluice gate 2.70
Pipe Exit 1.00 1 1
Water Meter 7.00
FKL 3.88 EKL 3.39
Town of Etowah Page 6 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

Influent Pump Station
250.00
200.00
23 150.00
•E
ro
0 100.00
r3
50.00
0.00
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow(gpm)
-Two Pumps -One Pump
Town of Etowah Page 7 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

SECTION 4 HEADWORKS AND PRIMARY TREATMENT
This project includes the installation of one 2.5 mm static wedge wire screen to augment the trash and
debris removal of the existing WWTP. A bypass pipe and valving will be installed to facilitate
maintenance of the screen. The existingtrash rack will be utilized duringbypass to protect
Yp
downstream process equipment. Equipment information from the design basis manufacturer is
included within Appendix A.
Town of Etowah Page 8 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

SECTION 5 DISINFECTION
The existing tablet chlorination/dechlorination system will be replaced with UV disinfection. Due to
the presence of EQ within the WWTP, the design flow rate for the UV system will be limited to a
peaking factor of 2.5 (312,500 gpd). Two redundant units will be installed in series to provide a firm
disinfection capacity of 312,500 gpd.
Parameter Value Unit
Design Flow Rate 0.3125 mgd
Maximum TSS (influent) • 30 mg/L
Maximum Particle Size (influent) 30 microns
Maximum Count (influent) 100,000 Fecal Coliforms/100mL
UV Transmittance (at 253.7 nm) 65% minimum
UV Dose (UVDGM(MS2)validation) 30 mJ/cm2
Design Count(effluent) 200 Fecal Coliforms/100mL
Temperature Range (effluent) 41-86 °F
Town of Etowah Page 9 Design Calculations
Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements November 2021

APPENDIX A - EQUIPMENT INFORMATION

I' Model SS
Stato Screen
Product Information Guide
AF _
}
` Y.
I
�Sr t
µ
i$
i
%\
•
.wl_
L
is-
F
L
t
F
L
70
_L
L
F
��F 1
y
1
Find more product information at: ulcan
vulcanindustries.com THE PROVEN SCREEN CHOICE

Model SS Stato Screen
IIIIillllllllllllllllllllllillllllillllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllilllllllllllllllllllllllllllllilllilllllllllllllllii
The Model SS Stato Screen is a non-mechanical screening Operation
device for separating solids from liquids. Because
there are no mechanical parts and the unit requires no Wastewater is pumped through the pipe inlet into the
power, these screens can be installed with minimal capital influent chamber. As the influent level rises it flows over
investment. With a wide range of uses the Stato Screen is the weir and beneath the pivoting baffle plate. The liquids
ideal for municipal waste water and industrial applications. and solids flow over the triple-arc wave wire screen panel,
:,IIIIIIIIII,,III!!Iliiilllllllllllllllllllllllltlllllililllilllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllilllllllll and wastewater falls through the screen openings, while
gravity and the addition of more screenings push captured
Construction solids toward the point of discharge. The water that falls
though the screen enters the effluent distribution chamber
Available in 304 or 316 Stainless Steel with flanged inlet and flows through the outlet pipe. A drip lip at the bottom
and outlet pipes. Hinged enclosures, extended discharge of the screen directs any excess water to the effluent
chutes and spray systems are available as optional features. chamber. When the solids reach the bottom of the screen
they slide off into a container, conveyor, or other suitable
receiving device. Vulcan Industries offers a wide array of
post-screening and dewatering devices. To assemble the
most cost effective and efficient screening system, please
contact your Vulcan Industries representative.
P
PIVOTING BAFFLE PLATE f
B___ I1 o t
k;
SCREEN PANEL �'
3`�: B
r i.
D"
e
474t, ' �--INFLUENT
x. ., DRAIN / " C
36"
? 'a,,
EFFLUENT—�
2•-11" 4"f--
A 5'-11"
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
Screen Openings
INCH 0.010 0.020 0.030 0.040 0.060 0.080 0.100
MM 0.25 0.50 .75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Model Design Flow PM) A B C D
55-18 30 60 90 140 180 200 220 20 1/2" 4" 6" 7"
55-24 40 80 120 200 260 300 340 261/2" 6" 8" 8"
SS-36 60 200 270 320 340 360 430 381/2" 6" 8" 8"
SS-48 140 500 630 700 740 780 860 SO 1/2" 8" 10" 9"
55-60 170 640 780 870 920 960 1070 62 1/2" 10" 12" 10"
55-72 210 800 950 1050 1100 1150 1300 741/2" 10" 12" 10'
55-96 270 1000 1200 1325 1400 1475 1650 98 1/2" 12" 14" 11"
55-120 330 1 1200 1450 1600 1700 1800 2000 122 1/2" 12" 18" 13"
Flow rates are based upon clean water flow.
Find more product information at: 212 S. Kirlin Street
vulcanindustries.com Missouri Valley, Iowa 51555 USA
712-642-2755 Fax [phone] vulcan
E PROVEN SCREEN CHOICE

TROJAN 3000TM TROJAN 3000T"
WASTEWATER DISINFECTION
..,
. . A1114111
- ,
I ‘.
-,.
, -
I ...
•. •
..-- ,.---
oir
...- ' ,.
• do N - - -;•• .....
'- 1
• 40 •
..>-,-, lio • . 1
-/-",--,
I v, ...
C...",„
.. •
v,-

TROJAN UV3000TMPTP TROJAN UV3000TMB
el
• ,
j
,1
Pitovv•
-7)
1 TROJAN U11300Q B
-
- ' NUi11.11.11.11.111111."6:i
A r r
li. 4
Simple, Dependable UV Solutions
Proven, chemical-free disinfection from the industry leader
Trojan Technologies is an In North America alone,almost one pre-engineered for quick,inexpensive
ISO 9001:2000 registered company in five wastewater treatment plants installation with pipe runs using pre-
1 that has set the standard for proven UV rely on our proven,chemical-free fabricated,flanged stainless steel
technology and ongoing innovation for disinfection solutions. channels,or into existing chlorine
more than 30 years.With unmatched The TrojanUV3000"PTP(Packaged contact basins and effluent channels.
scientific and technical expertise,and Treatment Plant)and TrojanUV3000T"B The TrojanUV3000TM'B offers increased
a global network of water treatment are two of the reasons why.These capacity and is available with a controller
specialists,representatives and simple,robust,and operator friendly that enables flow pacing to maximize
technicians,Trojan is trusted more systems have demonstrated their operating efficiency and extend lamp
than any other firm as the best choice effective,reliable performance in life.The system turns UV lamp banks
for municipal UV solutions.Trojan has over 2,000 installations around the on and off automatically to ensure the
the largest UV installation base—over world.The TrojanUV3000TM'PTP is required dose is met using the fewest
6,000 municipal installations worldwide. lamps and least electricity.
1

TROJAN UV3000'PTP TROJAN UV3000TMB
Robust, operator-friendly solutions designed for economical disinfection
1
Olo, Nip........
System Monitor/Control Center
1
/ ram'`
TrojanUV3000TMPTP—Optional
The optional System Monitor a �`A! -
includes a submersible UV sensor, ' ::::.''
and provides digital output of UV �'
intensity at each bank.Elapsed time w µ li.f ' `'
display provides continuous readout
of actual hours of operation(lamp
hours).A dry contact enables -
a remote low UV intensity alarm. �
it
_._._ 104
rp` try Water Level Control
i,....,,
i TrojanUV3000T'PTP
j A fixed weir maintains the correct
channel effluent depth over different
flow rates,with maximum headloss
s..
of 1.5 inches(3.8 cm)at peak flow.
! Equipped with a drain for easy
channel cleaning,and available for
_ _,...- --.--.- - - - both concrete channels and stainless
steel channel option.
TrojanUV3000TMB
The System Control Center(SCC)provides
control of all UV functions,tracks lamp hours,
and uses a submersible UV sensor(one
per bank)to monitor UV intensity.The SCC
is capable of"flow pacing"—automatically
turning banks of UV lamps off or on in
response to changes in the flow rate in order
to conserve power and prolong lamp life.
2

Electronic Ballast
- TRC
TrojanUV3000T"PTP/B
- t t_ j The electronic ballast is mounted within
its own TYPE 6P(IP67)-rated watertight
enclosure within the module frame,and
is cooled by convection.
e.«.
/ - '` Power Distribution
— �f e—
;,,01411101111.11 - it48,
I N. 4
• A b 1
Alli
i
TrojanUV3000TMPTP TrojanUV30001"B
Each Power Distribution Receptacle The Power Distribution Center(PDC)
(PDR)powers two(2)UV modules is constructed of stainless steel and is
and allows for quick and safe electrical mounted across the channel.The PDC
disconnect.The duplex ground fault distributes power to individual modules
interrupter receptacles ensure operator and allows electrical isolation of each
safety,and are mounted inside Type 3R module for easy service.
rain shield boxes.
A.` UV Modules Stainless Steel Effluent Channel
" TrojanUV3000'"PTP/B
> ' " t
UV lamps are mounted on stainless steel
frames.Lamps are enclosed in quartz
3 sleeves,and submerged horizontally and
/ parallel to water flow.A bank is made
up of multiple modules placed in parallel
positions.All wiring,from ballasts to lamps,
f runs inside the module frame.A display
showing individual lamp status is provided
+k.
on topof each module.
TrojanUV3000T"B TrojanUV3000T"PTP-Optional
Available with a fixed weir or Automatic An optional Type 304 stainless steel channel,
Level Control(ALC)gate in the channel complete with UV Module Support Rack,
to maintain the appropriate water level can be used.Channel can be installed as a
over the lamps.Trojan engineers will freestanding structure connected to flanged
work with you to select the appropriate pipes using the optional transition boxes.
level control device for your application.
3

Key Benefits
TrojanUV3000TM'PTP / TrojanUV3000T"B
Increased operator, community and environmental safety.
The TrojanUV3000TPTP and TrojanUV3000TM'B use environmentally friendly ultraviolet light
—the safest alternative for wastewater disinfection. No disinfection by-products are created,
and no chlorine compounds must be transported, stored or handled by plant staff.
Proven disinfection based on actual dose delivery testing (bioassay validation), and
over 2,000 TrojanUV3000'PTP and TrojanUV3000TMB installations worldwide.Verified field
performance data eliminates sizing assumptions resulting from theoretical dose calculations.
Reduced engineering and installation costs. The TrojanUV3000T""PTP can
be equipped with pre-fabricated stainless steel channels and transition boxes for in-line
integration with existing flanged piping —thus minimizing engineering and installation costs.
Both systems can be easily retrofitted into existing chlorine contact tanks and effluent
channels, and come pre-tested, pre-assembled and pre-wired to minimize installation costs.
Designed for simplicity and reliability. Using Trojan's most proven, modular
design and robust components, including low-pressure lamps,these systems are
straightforward to operate and require minimal operator involvement.
Operator-friendly maintenance.Trojan lamps are guaranteed for 12,000 hours
(15 months) of operation, and can be replaced,without tools, in less than three minutes per
lamp. Modules are electrically separate, allowing a single module to be removed without
disrupting flow or taking the system off-line.
Outdoor installation flexibility. All components of the TrojanUV3000T"PTP and
TrojanUV3000TM'B systems can be installed outdoors, eliminating the need and costs of a
building, shelter, and air conditioning for ballast cooling.
Well suited to changing regulations. Trojan UV systems do not have any negative
impact on receiving waters, making them a strategic, long-term choice as regulations
become increasingly stringent.
Guaranteed performance and comprehensive warranty. Trojan UV systems
include a Lifetime Disinfection Performance Guarantee,the best lamp warranty in the
industry, and offer lamps from multiple approved suppliers.Ask for details.
4

TR V OJAN U 3000 PTP TROJAN UV3000 B
Advanced, Self-Contained UV Modules
Compact footprint simplifies installation and eliminates air conditioning costs
Benefits: LiRoJANuy3oo0
• Space-saving, electronic ballasts are housed right in the modules,
not in separate external cabinets, „lc/
to minimize footprint size, �..
installation time and costs
• Convection cooling of the ballast
eliminates costs associated with air
conditioning or forced-air cooling
• Lamps are protected in a fully-
submersible, Type 316 stainless
steel frame
• All wiring and cables are safely The advanced, self-contained modules of the TrojanUV3000'"PTP and TrojanUV3000'"B
incorporate convection-cooled ballasts and feature a UV lamp status indicator(below)for
enclosed inside the waterproof at-a-glance confirmation that all lamps are operating.
module frame —fully protecting
them from effluent and UV light • Streamlined module minimizes
• Modules are electrically separated headloss and prevents build-up
from each other, allowing them of debris on the lamps # ;°
to be individually removed for • All module wiring is pre-installed
maintenance and a spare module and factory-tested •'
quickly inserted to maintain •
maximum performance
r•j•.' ••• i - - •• •c • e Pr. i•e Significant Advantages
Module-Mounted Ballasts • Take up less space and reduce footprint,minimizing installation time and costs
• Housing the ballasts in the module allows for natural convection cooling to dissipate the
Convection Cooling heat of the ballasts into the air
• The ballasts are kept sealed and protected
• No air conditioning or forced-air cooling required
• Some suppliers use external cabinets with forced-air cooling.This introduces dust
Clean,Water-Tight Protection and moisture onto circuit boards and other electronic components,greatly reducing
the life of these components
• Internal housing in Trojan's sealed module keeps all components dry and clean
• All lamp-ballast wiring is contained within the module frame,This configuration
Internal Cabling protects wires and cables from exposure to effluent,debris fouling and UV light
• Internal cabling allows all electrical connections within the module to be factory-tested
5

TROJAN UV3000"PTP 1 TROJAN UV3000 e
Proven Performance, Components and Design
Validated through regulatory-endorsed bioassay testing and over 1,000 installations worldwide 1
Benefits: ,-, ;' "<.� .
• Performance data is generated 4 r . -'1 -
from actual field testing (bioassay
validation) over a range of flow - - •-
rates, effluent quality and UVTs 1; til
• Provides regulatory-endorsed,
physical verification that systems M 1 w '
I will perform as expected—ensuring go. .. C i
public and environmental safety
• Most accurate assessment of
system sizing needs
• Low-pressure lamps and ballasts
have proven their outstanding `*
reliability in thousands of installations
• Open-channel design allows '\
cost-effective installation into
existing effluent channels & The TrojanUV3000'"PTP and TrojanUV3000'"13 feature a gravity-fed, open-channel design
that delivers cost savings at installation through simple retrofits into existing effluent channels
chlorine contact basins and chlorine contact tanks. Rugged,proven components make operation and maintenance
• Systems can be installed outdoors extremely cost-effective.
to reduce building capital costs
• Modular design is scalable for
precise sizing, and expandable _
to meet new regulatory or _,.,.
capacity requirements
Designed & Built for Easy Maintenance
User-friendly design requires minimal service and operator involvement '"
TROJAN '; ii-+
Benefits:
• Trojan lamps are warranted for
12,000 hours (15 months) It-,,,•
• Routine maintenance can be a
scheduled and completed ti ' 3
I 6.. . ..4.31
without disrupting disinfection *—,
mo
• Replacement of UV lamps can
be completed without tools
and requires less than 3 minutes
per lamp
Lightweight,self-contained modules are operator-friendly and make routine maintenance quick and
easy.Modules can be individually removed for periodic sleeve cleaning and lamp replacement after
12,000 hours(15 months).An optional,mobile cleaning rack simplifies maintenance procedures.
6

TROJAN UV3000•pjp
Highly Flexible Installation Configurations
TrojanUV3000TMPTP is pre-engineered for cost-effective integration with piping or channels
Benefits: ••�;,, `',`° 4.4; . _
• Systems are pre-designed tolmI�"' ' , F
meet disinfection requirements , a _:: _- - =-- $
with minimal engineering costs a. 1
• Systems can be installed in ��
series to treat higher flows or V
provide additional redundancy
• Pre-engineered stainless
steel channels with built-in
weirs are installed as a . - ' -
freestanding structure
• Stainless steel channels are easily
integrated with existing flanged Figure 1: Banks in Series — Side View
piping using Trojan's highly flexible
transition boxes(Figure 1) '—,_, r
• Optional turn boxes minimize — -,
system footprint by connecting '_ °
stainless steel channels and
allowing two banks in series to be
installed side-by-side (Figure 2) Transition Box —Banks can include up to 10 modules
• Transition boxes allow flanged pipe
connection on any of three sides
for flexible integration (Figure 3) Figure 2: Banks in Series With Turn Box — Overhead View
n rn n
_ter
w I
E. �
I , - �
.-r al L• 1,1
Turn box allows banks in series to be configured in a very small footprint
Figure 3: Banks in Series — Overhead View
t
r QM. 1EPEI� _-
C J
tti ->,
I Transition boxes allow pipe connection on any side
The TrojanUV3000TMPTP is pre-engineered for simple,effective,low cost wastewater disinfection. The optional 304 stainless steel channels feature
a UV module support rack, and can be installed as a freestanding unit. Trojan turn boxes and transition boxes allow systems to be incorporated with
maximum flexibility and minimal footprint.
7

TROJAN Uv3000"B
Flow Pacing Reduces O&M Costs
TrojanUV3000TMB system controller offers flow-pacing for increased operating efficiency
Benefits:
• The System Control Center
(SCC) provides monitoring and
control of all UV functions
• The SCC provides digital display TROJAN 3000'
of bank status, lamp hours, and , -
UV intensity(mW/cm2) •
• The SCC allows the
TrojanUV3000T'"B to be flow
paced — meaning the UV lamps
of individual banks are turned on
and off automatically in response
to variations in flow rate (based
on a flow meter signal)
• Flow pacing maximizes operating
efficiency by matching UV output
to disinfection requirements, and
reducing electrical consumption The System Control Center of the TrojanUV3000'',5 monitors lamp hours and uses a submerged
UV Sensor to feed accurate data on UV intensityfor at-a-glance system status. The SCC also
rioflow flow by g y during periods
allows flow pacing to minimize operating and maintenance costs by turning banks on and off
turning lamps off(Figures 1 &2) based on flow requirements
• Flow pacing also increases
the operating life of UV lamps,
thereby reducing the frequency, Flow Pacing Optimizes System Efficiency
expense and labor required for
lamp replacement Figure 1:Operation During Periods of High Flow
!:_!
Lamps On Lamps On
Figure 2: Operation During Periods of Low Flow
A \ 4
Lamps On Lamps Off
8

•
TROJAN UV3000TMPTP TROJAN UV3000TMB
System Specifications
System Characteristics TrojanUVS000"'PTP TrojanUV9000"B
Typical Applications Up to 3 MGD(473 m3/hr) 1 —5 MGD(158—789 m3/hr)
Lamp Type Low-pressure
Ballast Type Electronic;non-variable
Input Power Per Lamp 45 or 87,5 Watts 87.5 Watts
Lamp Configuration Horizontal,parallel to flow
Module Configuration 2 or 4 lamps per module 4,6 or 8 lamps per module
Bank Configuration Up to 10 modules per bank Up to 20 modules per bank
Channel Configurations
Lamp Banks in Series Up to 2 Up to 3
Channel Options Stainless Steel(Trojan option) Concrete(by others)
or Concrete(by others)
Flanged Transition Connections Optional for stainless steel channels —
U-Turn Connector Box Optional for stainless steel channels —
Level Control Device Options Fixed weir ALC gate or fixed weir
Enclosure Ratings
System Monitor/Control Center 304 stainless steel
Ballast Enclosure TYPE 6P(IP67)
Ballast Cooling Method Convection;no air conditioning or forced air required
Installation Location Indoor or outdoor
System Monitoring&Controls
Controller Optional;Monitoring only Monitoring and bank control
UV Intensity Monitoring Optional Optional
Flow Pacing — Optional
Inputs Required None 4-20 mA flow signal for Flow Pacing
Local Status Indication Lamp Age(hours)
UV Intensity(mW/cm2)
Bank Status(on/off)
Low Intensity Alarm
Lamp Failure Alarm
Remote Alarms UV Intensity(4-20 mA)
Common Alarm(discrete)
Location Indoor or outdoor
Maximum Distance from UV Channel 15 ft(4.5 m) 20 ft(6 m)
Electrical Requirements
Power Distribution Individual GFI Receptacles Power Distribution Centre
Quantity Required 1 receptacle per 2 modules 1 PDC per bank
Power Input 120V,single phase 120V,single phase
208V,3-phase
240V,single phase
Find out how your wastewater treatment plant can benefit from the TrojanUV3000TMPTP or TrojanUV3000TMB—call us today.
Head Office(Canada) Trojan UV Technologies UK Limited(UK):[phone]
3020 Gore Road Trojan Technologies(The Netherlands):[phone]
London,Ontario Trojan Technologies(France):[phone]
Canada N5V 4T7 Trojan Technologies Italia(Italy):[phone]
Telephone:[phone] Trojan Technologies Espana(Spain):[phone]
Fax:[phone] Trojan Technologies Deutschland GmbH(Germany):[phone]
www.trojanuv.com Hach/Trojan Technologies(China):86-10-65150290
The products described in this publication may be protected by ono or more patents in The United States of America,
Canada and/or other countries.For a list of patents owned by Trojan Technologies,go to www.trojanuv.corn.
MWW-004(0311)
TROJAN UV
0 Printed in Canada.Copyright 2011.Trojan Technologies,London,Ontario,Canada. WATER CONFIDENCE"
No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in a retrieval system,or transmitted in any form or by any means
without the written permission of Trojan Technologies.

3— " REO1N121oUIRED—A4C PER BOLTS
� � `924'� (BY OTHERS)EN BOX TROJAN UV 3000-PTP
(BY
DOWNSTREAM I EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS
OF WEIR
wSTSAME AS -N _— OF BOTH BANKS D3400K WEIR BOX (OPTION) No. DESCRIPTION FROM TO 1
STANDARD I e WL=2.51'
iv [0.765m] (REPLACES DOWNSTREAM TRANSITION 1 SPUI ItK PANEL POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION PANEL(DP) SPLATTER PANEL
C BOX AND WEIR IN CHANNEL AS SHOWN BELOW) 120V, 1 PHASE, 2 WIRE,ACTUAL DRAW (NOT SHOWN) (BY OTHERS)
12.7 AMPS/SPLITTER PANEL
(BY OTHERS)
DOUBLE FLOW WEIR BOX FRONT AND END VIEW NOT
SHOWN 2 POWER DISTRIBUTION RECEPTACLE (PDR) SPLITTER PANEL PDR
— HEIGHT OF WEIR BOX TO MATCH TRANSITION BOX POWER SUPPLY (BY OTHERS)
ml•a , 1i" 1i" — TOP OF WEIR ELEVATION WILL NOT CHANGE FROM 120V, 1 PHASE, 2 WIRE,
[38] [38] STANDARD FRONT VIEW ACTUAL DRAW 6.3 AMPS/PDR
3 STSILM MONITOR POWER SUPPLY DP (NOT SHOWN) SYSTEM MONITOR
12DV, 1 PHASE.2 WIRE.5 AMPS (BY OTHERS)
tl h SPLITTER PANEL(BY OTHERS) H d �i- M10 a ANCHOR BOLTS HOLE&BOLT
L WALL MOUNTED [ — CIRCLE TO FIT
N EFFLUENT PIPE LOCATED WITHIN 10 FT. [3.048m] PDR 4 PER
SYSTEM MONITOR REQUIRED TTtAT1SITION BOX 12-e[3000 (FOR DIN.
OF POWER END OF MODULES (TYPICAL) ��
I'—' (BY OTHERS) (TYPICAL) (TYPICAL) (BY OTHERS) BS&JIS)]
PIPE& FLANGE
— — — BANK 1B —... + BANK 1A M ^ Apt i t911
n �t
•
�a Flow _--� 4. • I I t I C FLOW o
T4...„
� �� I --- c `. - • o 8 1
. __
it _
_ __.,_.
Q w . =f � �
STANDARD 3400K LEVEL ACCESS PLATE WITH MODULE LAMP . L I u
PIIIA
WARNING LABEL STATUS VIEWING INFLUENT PIPE
.na u y CONTROL WEIR (TYPICAL) PLATE(TYPICAL) L� (BY OTHERS) `o ry
11" 1," P LAN VIEW
[38] [38] 3 SCALE:AS SHOWN © r
WALL MOUNTED STSILM MONITOR \/
O LOCATED WITHIN 15FT. [4.572m] END V I E W
STANDARD 3400K LEVEL• 0 _ OF CHANNEL(TYPICAL)
PDR •2 2• CONTROL WEIR W/DRAIN ©z© El'. 10 FEET 3.048re (TY P I CAL)
(TYPICAL) �i}jI�
E PAW`E AlCBL I P M E -ri I • ' •L R ) TRANSITION BOX SCALE:AS SHOWN
STANDARD PLUG 4 REQUIRED/ BANK REMOVABLE COVER (TYPICAL)
WITH GROUND (TPICAL) PLATE(TYPICAL)
(TYPICAL)
<___F,.....,_. ..
_ II
_ 4 V
• I k__ —_---__-- I I —_—--___—__ ' e[NI6]
a I C ¢ == ('j WL=2.43' z 12 HOLES 1111
0 - wL=z.or —" i ---_� la _-- N [o.7aom] _
c w SOUD BLOCKING 02" [e50]
•_ m `$r9 Lu Z (BY OTHERS) (TYPICAL) PT DRAINe2" [e50] I 1•— •c _ n <o z [ ><}_ , WITH PLUG Imo- �f
1 < NPT DRAIN [414]
"VI x (TYPICAL) . WITH PLUG
I
c_� r1� u �� V V EL=0.00' [0.000m1 `ID
t I
[zs21] •
1s'-2' [2921] SECTION' " r. SCALE:AS SHOWN
[616] [5842] [616]
A
NOTES: ` / MULTIPLE CHANNELS IN PARALLEL (OPTION):
V: DO NQ SLOPE CHANNEL FLOOR. FRONT I E W :ADDITIONAL UNITS CAN BE INSTALLED PARALLEL TO THE UNIT SHOWN. I DIM "A"
:CHANNEL WIDTH & DEPTH MUST BE KEPT WITHIN A TOLERANCE OF + OR — )M'[6]. SCALE:AS SHOWN :ACCESS BETWEEN EVERY 2 PARALLEL CHANNELS IS REQUIRED FOR MODULE W/WEIR IN TRANSITION BOX 24'-13"[7360]
:ANCHOR BOLTS ARE NOT SUPPUED BY TROJAN TECHNOLOGIES. REMOVAL— NOTE THE CHANNEL WIDTH AND ENSURE ADEQUATE ACCESS IS
: BOLTS, WASHERS AND NUTS FOR CONNECTION OF CHANNELS AND PROVIDED BETWEEN TRANSITION BOXES AND CHANNELS. W/WEIR IN CHANNEL 23'-2}" [7074]
TRANSITION BOXES TO CHANNELS ARE PROVIDED BY TROJAN TECHNOLOGIES. :ACCESS BETWEEN A MAXIMUM OF 2 CHANNELS IS N0I REQUIRED FOR MODULE
:SYSTEM CONDUIT. WIRING. DISTRIBUTION PANELS& INTERCONNECTIONS BY OTHERS. REMOVAL.TRANSITION BOXES CAN BE INSTALLED ADJACENT TO EACH OTHER.
: ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SHOWN ARE TO SUPPLY TROJAN IN EQUIPMENT ONLY.
ELECTRICAL INRUSH FACTOR TO BE ADDED AS PER LOCAL CODE. DESCRIPTION: STANDARD DRAWING NO.
:ANY EXTRA OUTLETS NOT BEING USED BY TROJAN EQUIPMENT HAVE NOT BEEN "S" LAYOUT, UV3000PTP—UV3400K 1 CHANNEL 3M0276
V
INCLUDED IN THE INTERCONNECT AMPERAGE. TROJAN U 2 BANK 4 LAMPS WEIR
:CONTRACTOR TO REVIEW ALL TROJAN TECHNOLOGIES INSTALLATION REFERENCE ND.
INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE DRAWN BY I LZ/JMM/SPM DATE 112JN21
:ACCESS IS REQUIRED FOR MODULE REMOVAL— NOTE THE CHANNEL WIDTH Copyright02012 by Trojan Technologies. All rights reserved. CHECKED BY : SAH DATE : 12JN22 N/A
AND ENSURE ADEQUATE ACCESS IS PROVIDED TO ALL MODULES. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a
: DO!DI ENCASE THE STEEL CHANNEL IN CONCRETE retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, without the APPROVED BY : CAP DATE : 1 2JN22
vim ��:[] INDICATES MILOMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED written permission of Trojan Technologies. D01 C;
SCALE (834n1 t) NOT TO SCALE LOG NUMBER N/A

APPENDIX B - HYDRAULIC
CALCULATIONS

DESIGN PEAK FLOW
FLOW 1
Etowah WWTP Hydraulic Profile
2 3
Flow Conditions(MGD) Input====>
Flow Conditions(cfs) 0.19 0.0
DOWNSTREAM CONTROL WATER SURFACE ELEVATION 2096.83 2096.83
1. UV TO EFFLUENT PS
CIRCULAR PIPE(Flowing Full) DOWNSTREAM W.S. EL. = 2096.83 2096.83
BASED ON HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQ.FOR HEADLOSS
HL(friction)=4.727*L*(Q/C)'85/d487 INVERT EL. = 2,092.21 2,092.21
HL(fittings)=K*V2/2G WHERE G=32.2 FT/SEC2
%OF FLOW THROUGH PIPE = 100.00% 100.00%
Q=FLOW THROUGH PIPE,cfs = 0.19 0.48
d=PIPEDIAM,IN =
L=LENGTH OF PIPE,FEET =
C=ROUGHNESS COEFFICIENT =
SUM OF K = 2.5
NO.OF
FITTINGS K-value, FITTINGS K-total
90 DEG BEND 0.3 0.6 1
45 DEG BEND 0.2 0.4
TEE,STRAIGHT THRU 0.2 0.0
TEE,BRANCH TO LINE 1.0 0.0
TEE,LINE TO BRANCH 1.0 0.0
ENTR,INWARD PROJECT'G 0.8 0.0
ENTR.,SHARP CRNR 0.5 0.5
ENTR.BELL MOUTH 0.1 0.0
SLUICE GATE 2.7 0.0
GATE VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 0.2 0.0
BUTTERFLY VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 0.7 0.0
SWING CHECK VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 2.5 0.0
PLUG VALVE,ECCENTRIC(FULLY OPEN) 1.0 0.0
FLAP GATE 1.5 0.0
EXIT LOSS 1.0 1.0
OTHER 1.0 0.0
SUM OF K-VALUES = 2.5
INCREASER/REDUCER di = Inlet Diameter,in
d2= Exit Diameter,in
L=Increaser Length,in
Theta = N/A
KINCR/RED N/A

VELOCITY CHECK FOR PIPE,FPS 0.85 2.15
Minimum acceptable velocity 0.50 fps
Maximum acceptable velocity 8.00 fps
FRICTION HEADLOSS THROUGH PIPE,FEET 0.020 0.110
LOSS FROM INCREASER=K,NCR`(V12)/2g Uses"V"from Smaller Diameter Pipe 0.000 0.000
MINOR LOSSES,FEET=K`V2/2g 0.028 0.179
TOTAL LOSS IN PIPE, FT ROUNDED 0.05 0.29
WATER ELEVATION, FT 2096.88 2097.12
2. HEADLOSS THROUGH UV CHANNEL
DOWNSTREAM W.S. EL. (SET BY EFFLUENT WEIR) = 2101.51 2101.51
HL manually input based on data provide by manufacturer
%OF FLOW THROUGH CHANNEL = 100.00% 100.00%
FLOW THROUGH UNIT,cfs = 0.19 0.48
HEADLOSSES,FEET(Designer's Input) 0.42 0.42
TOTAL LOSS IN CHANNEL, FT ROUNDED 0.42 0.42
WATER ELEVATION, FT 2101.93 2101.93
3A. Combined Pipe to UV
CIRCULAR PIPE(Flowing Full) DOWNSTREAM W.S. EL. = 2101.93 2101.93
BASED ON HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQ.FOR HEADLOSS
HL(friction)=4.7271L`(Q/C)'88/d4 87 INVERT EL. =- 2,090.53 2,090.53
HYittings)=K`V2/2G WHERE G=32.2 FT/SEC2
%OF FLOW THROUGH PIPE _ 100.00% 100.00%
Q=FLOW THROUGH PIPE,cfs = 0.19 0.48
d=PIPE DIAM,IN =
L=LENGTH OF PIPE,FEET =
C=ROUGHNESS COEFFICIENT =
SUM OF K = 3.1

NO.OF
FITTINGS K-value FITTINGS K-total
90 DEG BEND 0.3 0.6
45 DEG BEND 0.2 0.0
TEE,STRAIGHT THRU 0.2 0.0
TEE, BRANCH TO LINE 1.0 1.0
TEE,LINE TO BRANCH 1.0 0.0
ENTR, INWARD PROJECT'G 0.8 0.0
ENTR.,SHARP CRNR 0.5 0.5
ENTR.BELL MOUTH 0.1 0.0
SLUICE GATE 2.7 0.0
GATE VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 0.2 0.0
BUTTERFLY VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 0.7 0.0
SWING CHECK VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 2.5 0.0
PLUG VALVE,ECCENTRIC(FULLY OPEN) 1.0 0.0
FLAP GATE 1.5 0.0
EXIT LOSS 1.0 1.0
OTHER 1.0 0.0
SUM OF K-VALUES = 3 1
INCREASER/REDUCER d = Inlet Diameter,in
d2= Exit Diameter,in
L= Increaser Length,in
Theta = 28.07
KINCR/RED 0.15
VELOCITY CHECK FOR PIPE,FPS 0.85 2.15
Minimum acceptable velocity )25 fps
Maximum acceptable velocity 8 00 fps
FRICTION HEADLOSS THROUGH PIPE,FEET 0.009 0.051
LOSS FROM INCREASER=KiNCR*(V12)/29 Uses"V"from Smaller Diameter Pipe 0.002 0.014
MINOR LOSSES,FEET=K'V2/2g 0.035 0.222
TOTAL LOSS IN PIPE, FT ROUNDED 0.05 0.29
WATER ELEVATION, FT 2101.98 2102.22

3B. From Treatment Unit#2 to UV
CIRCULAR PIPE(Flowing Full) DOWNSTREAM W.S. EL. = 2101.98 2102.22
BASED ON HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQ.FOR HEADLOSS
HL(friction)=4.727*L*(Q/C)1•85/d487 INVERT EL. = 2,090.53 2,090.53
HL(fittings)=K*V2/2G WHERE G=32.2 FT/SEC2
%OF FLOW THROUGH PIPE = 100.00% 100.00%
Q=FLOW THROUGH PIPE,cfs = 0.19 0.48
d=PIPE DIAM,IN =
L=LENGTH OF PIPE,FEET =
C=ROUGHNESS COEFFICIENT =
SUMOFK = 3.8
NO.OF
FITTINGS K-value FITTINGS K-total
90 DEG BEND 0.3 0.9
45 DEG BEND 0.2 0.4
TEE,STRAIGHT THRU 0.2 0.0
TEE,BRANCH TO LINE 1.0 0.0
TEE,LINE TO BRANCH 1.0 0.0
ENTR,INWARD PROJECT'G 0.8 0.0
ENTR.,SHARP CRNR 0.5 0.5
ENTR.BELL MOUTH 0.1 0.0
SLUICE GATE 2.7 0.0
GATE VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 0.2 0.0
BUTTERFLY VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 0.7 0.0
SWING CHECK VALVE(FULLY OPEN) 2.5 0.0
PLUG VALVE,ECCENTRIC(FULLY OPEN) 1.0 1.0
FLAP GATE 1.5 0.0
EXIT LOSS 1.0 1.0
OTHER 1.0 0.0
SUM OF K-VALUES = 3.8
INCREASER/REDUCER di = Inlet Diameter,in
d2=Exit Diameter,in
L= Increaser Length,in
Theta = N/A
KINCR/RED N/A
VELOCITY CHECK FOR PIPE,FPS 0.85 2.15
Minimum acceptable velocity 0.25 fps
Maximum acceptable velocity 8.00 fps
FRICTION HEADLOSS THROUGH PIPE,FEET 0.030 0.165
LOSS FROM INCREASER=KiNCR*(V12)/2g Uses"V"from Smaller Diameter Pipe 0.000 0.000
MINOR LOSSES,FEET=K*V2/2g 0.043 0.272
TOTAL LOSS IN PIPE, FT ROUNDED 0.07 0.44
WATER ELEVATION, FT 2102.05 2102.66
OPERATING WATER ELEVATION IN TANK 2105.22 2105.22
CHECK WATER ELEVATION REQ'D<OPERATING LEVEL YES YES

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ETOWAH SEWER COMPANY
WASTEWATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
CENTRAL STATES WATER RESOURCES, INC.
HENDERSON COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
J
FINAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR REVIEW ONLY
NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
mcgill E1ies
ing
munt
ther®

it
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ETOWAH SEWER COMPANY
WASTEWATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
CENTRAL STATES WATER RESOURCES, INC.
HENDERSON COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
Civil/Process Design Electrical Design
(All Sections except (Division 26)
noted)
,� '�'A Ro, �� CARO
!/�'�.,� $:pEESSr4
FA N. Y0C MI._��j ; � = 4081
050993 - SEAL
mcgi •i Ei.
g
y 6' g41 a I '�i Q�'•f,NCI NED:'��:
-11N
i,,,',-EL'1111111� %,\`\` Daniel'(?uIIl Nbaln�el -2 eby
55 Broad Street
Griffee Date:2021.11.09
Nelson Heringer, PE Daniel Griffee, PE
Asheville, North Carolina 28801 McGill Associates, P.A. McGill Associates, P.A.
Firm License No.: C-0459 Structural Design
(Division 03 and 05) 1
NOVEMBER 2021
PROJECT NO. 21.00317 $•`v. • • A 4%
S SEAL
1m{/w-( °
��� ,99.!.GlN. '...v��
''lil/111M111"\\
Edward Medlock, PE
Medlock and Associates, P.A.

CENTRAL STATES WATER RESOURCES. INC,
ETOWAH SEWER COMPANY
WASTEWATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 SUMMARY
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 REINFORCED CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
055119 METAL GRATING STAIRS AND WALKWAYS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
099000 PAINTING
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
223120 NON-CLOG SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP STATION
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
262213 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262813 FUSES
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
NOVEMBER 2021 TOC-1 PROJECT# 21.00317

CENTRAL STATES WATER RESOURCES. INC,
fTOWAH SEWER COMPANY
WASTEWATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
312230 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
322905 RESTORATION OF SURFACES
323113 CHIAN LINK FENCES AND GATES
329200 TURF AND GRASSES
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
332700 SANITARY SEWER PIPE AND APPURTENANCES
332735 EXPOSED PIPING
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION,
AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT
432613 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMPS
DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
462156 WEDGE WIRE SCREEN
466600 OPEN CHANNEL UV TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
NOVEMBER 2021 TOC-2 PROJECT# 21.00317

SECTION 011000 SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Phased construction.
4. Work by Owner.
5. Work under separate contracts.
6. Future work.
7. Purchase contracts.
8. Owner-furnished products.
9. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products.
10. Access to site.
11. Coordination with occupants.
12. Work restrictions.
13. Specification and drawing conventions.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Etowah Sewer Company Wastewater System
Improvements (McGill Associates Project No. 21.00317)
B. Project Location: Etowah, North Carolina (Henderson County)
C. Owner: Central States Water Resources, Inc. (1650 Des Peres Road, Suite
303, St. Louis, Missouri 63131)
1. Owner's Representative: Josiah Cox, President
D. Engineer: McGill Associates, PA, 55 Broad Street, Asheville, NC 28801
June 2021 Project#21.00317 011000-Page 1

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of
the following:
1. Demolition of existing influent pump station wet well top section,
guiderails, pumps, piping, and lifting chains; bypass pumping; wet well
cleaning; furnishing and installation of new concrete wet well top section,
access hatch, vent, pumps, guide rails, lifting chains, and piping;
furnishing and installation of a new precast concrete valve vault complete
with piping, valves, drain, and access hatch; construction, furnishing, and
installation of a wedge wire screen on an elevated cast-in-place concrete
platform; repair and rehabilitation of existing steel tankage; construction,
furnishing, and installation of a UV disinfection system on an elevated
cast-in-place concrete platform; site piping; above ground process piping;
electrical improvements; site restoration; demolition of existing access
stairs; furnishing and installation of new aluminum access staircases;
demolition and replacement of aluminum grating; fence demolition and
replacement; removal and installation of submersible wastewater pumps,
guide rails, and lifting chains at six sewer lift stations; furnishing and
installation of new manual transfer switches and portable generator
connections at four sewer lift stations; and other miscellaneous
appurtenances as detailed in the Contract Documents.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER (NOT USED)
1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS (NOT USED)
1.7 FUTURE WORK (NOT USED)
1.8 PURCHASE CONTRACTS (NOT USED)
1.9 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
1.10 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS (NOT
USED)
June 2021 Project#21.00317 011000—Page 2

1.11 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction
operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited
only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions
of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by
construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction
period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.12 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) during
entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work
so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing
exits unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors,
or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner
and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Notify the Owner not less than three 93) business days in advance of
activities that will affect Owner's operations.
1.13 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction
operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in any existing building to the facility's normal
business working hours, except as otherwise indicated or approved by the
Owner. All other work on site shall be conducted in accordance with the
requirements of the Modified General Conditions.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 011000-Page 3

1. Notify Engineer not less than three (3) business days in advance of
proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain Engineer's written permission before proceeding with utility
interruptions.
D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high
levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy
with Owner.
1. Notify Engineer not less than 3 business days in advance of proposed
disruptive operations.
2. Obtain Engineer's written permission before proceeding with disruptive
operations.
E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within any building or within 25
feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled
substances within any building (existing or constructed as part of this project) is
not permitted.
1.14 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and
Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format"
numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles
to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the
Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is
incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult
the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine
numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all
Sections in the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style
of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases
when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other
Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be
interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred
as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and
plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the
context of the Contract Documents indicates.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 011000-Page 4

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the
Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be
performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood
may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that
must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply depending with," de endin on
the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence
or phrase.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on
the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the
following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic
terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by common industry
abbreviations.
1.15 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE PLAN
A. General VWVfP Construction Sequence:
1. Construct erosion control measures.
2. Construct Static Screen and UV disinfection system. Provide temporary
effluent piping between UV system and effluent pump station.
3. Perform startup testing on UV disinfection system.
4. Take Plant No. 1 out of service and connect effluent to UV system.
5. Take Plant No. 2 out of service and connect effluent to UV system.
6. Connect proposed 6" effluent pipe to existing 6" pipe at effluent pump
station.
7. Perform startup testing for static screen.
8. Establish bypass pumping of existing influent pump station and static
screen.
9. Construction improvements to existing influent pump station.
10. Make connection between existing influent pump station and static screen.
11. Remove bypass pumping.
12. Complete remaining repairs and improvements.
13. Restore surfaces and remove erosion control measures.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 011000—Page 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
June 2021 Project#21.00317 011000—Page 6

SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises,
Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Demolish: Completely remove and legally dispose of off-site.
B. Recycle: Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
C. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them
off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and
reinstalled.
D. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner
to prevent damage, allow for further use, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
E. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for
reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
F. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be
permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed,
removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119—Page 1

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Timber, steel and other merchantable goods and materials removed incidental
to demolition shall remain the property of the Owner unless otherwise directed
C. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,
cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and
other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during
demolition remain the property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to
Owner.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner may operate portions of the facility immediately adjacent to selective
demolition operations. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will
not be disrupted.
1 . Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained
by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings
before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be
encountered in the Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,
do not disturb; immediately notify Engineer and Owner. Hazardous
materials will be removed by the Contractor by way of a Change Order or
by the Owner under a separate contract. If the removal of hazardous
materials results in a delay to the Contractor's schedule an appropriate
adjustment will be made to the Contract Time by way of Change Order.
A. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials may be present in buildings and
structures to be demolished. If a report on the presence of hazardous materials
is on file for review and use, the Contractor may examine report to become
aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119-Page 2

2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing
hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous
materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be
selectively demolished because of building operations or processes
performed there.
B. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and
protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1 . Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition
operations.
C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
1.6 PREDEMOLITION MEETING
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of
materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
4. Review and finalize protection requirements.
5. Review procedures for protection of adjacent structures.
6. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on
substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
7. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires
protection.
8. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner.
9. Review procedures for the disposal of hazardous waste.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that
indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for
environmental protection, dust control, and noise control. Indicate proposed
locations and construction of barriers.
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting
and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are
uninterrupted.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119—Page 3

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be
interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing
building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to
Owner prior to start of demolition.
D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
E. Warranties: Documentation indicated that any existing warranties remain in
effect after completion of selective demolition.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B. Landfill Records: Provide receipt for the acceptance of hazardous wastes by a
landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician
responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was
present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA
regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was
recovered.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hazardous Material Abatement Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that
has specialized in abatement work similar in material and extent to that
indicated for this Project.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and
surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before
proceeding.
B. Notify warrantor upon completion of selective demolition, and obtain
documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty
remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119-Page 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations
before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that all existing utilities have been disconnected, capped and/or de-
energized before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Review any available record documents of existing construction provided by
Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those
indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to
determine extent of selective demolition required.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict
with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the
nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Engineer.
A. Engage a professional engineer properly licensed to practice in the state of the
project site to perform an engineering survey of condition of structure to
determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or
unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during
selective demolition operations.
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from
selective demolition activities.
2. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include
recommendations for de-tensioning.
B. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured
drawings, preconstruction photographs, preconstruction videotapes, and
templates.
1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
Provide photographs and/or video of conditions that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119—Page 5

2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that
will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of
measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact
reproduction.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to
remain and protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions
specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate,
identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and
mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1 . Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts
of building.
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing,
and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be
removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible
piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug
piping with same or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap
services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate,
reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap
services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be
removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or
compatible ductwork material.
C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively
demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119—Page 6

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access Temporary
ora and Tem Co
ntrols: Conduct selective demolition and debris-
removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets. walks,
walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection
required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and
facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective
demolition area and to and from occupied portions of structures.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective
demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new
construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and
interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to
remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not
been removed.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural
supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or
collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or
uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of
selective demolition.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required
by new construction and as indicated. Upon completion of all new work,
completely remove any remaining existing construction. Use methods required
to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier
before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to
remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools
designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to
minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to
avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119—Page 7

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify
condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting
operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method
suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials
so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or
framing.
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner or
indicated on Drawings.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended
reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of
containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation
requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections,
supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional
for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against
damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Engineer,
items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective
demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective
demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with
construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then
remove concrete between saw cuts.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119-Page 8

B. Hazardous Materials: If hazardous materials are encountered during selective
demolition, obtain the services of a professional abatement firm to develop and
carry-out procedures for removal of hazardous materials.
C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with
construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between
saw cuts.
D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then
break up and remove.
E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of
Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based
adhesive strippers.
F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one
day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and
weathertight.
1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof
accessories.
2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
3.6 SITE RESTORATION
A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from
demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials.
B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a
smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth
transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Eliminate areas
where water may collect in depressions, including restoration of rutting from
Contractor's operations.
3.7 REPAIRS
A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent improvements caused by demolition
operations.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused,
salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property,
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119—Page 9

remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in
an approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other
device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
June 2021 Project#21.00317 024119—Page 10

SECTION 033000 REINFORCED CONCRETE
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals: Product Data, concrete mix designs and submittals required by
ACI 301.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer Qualifications: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ACI 301 , "Specification for Structural Concrete," and with ACI 117,
"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, as drawn, flat sheet.
D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
E. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
F. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
G. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
H. Fine and Course Aggregates: ASTM C 33
1 . Acquire all aggregate for entire project from same source
2. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
I. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
J. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, high-range water reducing. Do not use
calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
K. Vapor Retarder: 10 mil, Reinforced sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A.
November 2021 Project#21.00317 033000—Page 1

L. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
polyethylene sheet.
M. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,
Type 1, Class B.
N. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-FormingCuringand SealingCompound:
p
ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
O. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
ASTM C 1315, Type 1 , Class A.
P. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or
ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
2.3 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301.
B. Normal-Weight Concrete:
1 . Minimum Compressive Strength:
a. Footings: 3000 psi at 28 days
b. Interior Ground Floor Slab: 4000 psi at 28 days.
c. Exterior Slabs and Walks: 4000 psi at 28 days
d. Elevated Slabs: 4000 PSI at 28 days
e. Foundation Walls: 4000 psi at 28 days
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before
adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture plus
or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air
content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.
5. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume
as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would
otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.
6. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit use of fly ash to 25 percent
replacement of portland cement by weight and granulated blast-furnace
slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; silica fume to 10 percent
of portland cement by weight.
C. Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M.
1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
November 2021 Project#21.00317 033000—Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETING
A. Construct formwork according to ACI 301 and maintain tolerances and surface
irregularities within ACI 347R limits of Class A, 1/8 inch for concrete exposed to
view and for other concrete surfaces.
B. Place vapor retarder on prepared subgrade, with joints lapped 6 inches and
sealed.
C. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
D. Install construction, isolation, and contraction joints where indicated. Install full-
depth joint-filler strips at isolation joints.
E. Place concrete in a continuous operation and consolidate using mechanical
vibrating equipment.
F. Protect concrete from physical damage, premature drying, and reduced strength
due to hot or cold weather during mixing, placing, and curing.
G. Formed Surface Finish: Smooth-formed finish for concrete exposed to view,
coated, or covered by waterproofing or other direct-applied material; rough-
formed finish elsewhere.
H. Slab Finishes: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
Provide the following finishes:
1. Scratch finish for surfaces to receive mortar setting beds.
2. Float finish for surfaces to receive waterproofing, roofing, or other direct-
applied material.
3. Troweled finish for floor surfaces and floors to receive floor coverings, paint,
or other thin film-finish coatings.
4. Trowel and fine-broom finish for surfaces to receive thin-set tile.
5. Nonslip-broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps.
I. Cure formed surfaces bymoisture curingfor at least seven days.
Y
J. Begin curing concrete slabs after finishing. Apply membrane-forming curing and
sealing compound to concrete.
K. Owner will engage a testing agency to perform field tests and to submit test
reports.
November 2021 Project#21.00317 033000—Page 3

L. Protect concrete from damage. Repair and patch defective areas.
END OF SECTION 033000
November 2021 Project#21.00317 033000—Page 4

SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals: Shop Drawings and Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator.
1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.
B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following:
1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
3. AISC 360.
4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts."
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-
half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
C. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M
D. Materials complying with first option in "Plate and Bar" Paragraph below are
widely available; those complying with second option are less so.
E. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
F. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, 46 ksi,
structural tubing.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
November 2021 Project#21.00317 051200—Page 1

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1,
heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M,
Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M),
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
B. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Configuration: Headed, Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F 436 Type 1 , hardened carbon steel.
C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-
inhibiting primer.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant, factory packaged.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible.
Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" and AISC 360.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1 .1 M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality and methods used in correcting
welding work.
C. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning";
or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Shop prime steel to a dry film thickness
of at least 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Do not prime surfaces to be embedded in
concrete or mortar or to be field welded.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and
according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates.
Clean bottom surface of plates.
November 2021 Project#21.00317 051200—Page 2

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned
and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding,rotrudin , cut off
g
flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no
voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to
cure.
C. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure
before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and
other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.
D. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish
thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of
bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened
F. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality and methods used in correcting
welding work.
END OF SECTION 051200
November 2021 Project#21.00317 051200—Page 3

SECTION 055119 METAL GRATING STAIRS AND WALKWAYS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1 . Industrial Class stairs with steel-grating treads.
2. Industrial Class walkways with steel-grating treads.
3. Steel railings attached to metal stairs.
4. Steel handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them.
Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that
shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal grating stairs and the following:
1. Gratings.
2. Woven-wire mesh.
3. Welded-wire mesh.
4. Shop primer products.
5. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.
2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and
field joints.
3. Include plan at each level.
4. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachment of
wall-mounted handrails.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119-Page 1

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing
delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including
documentation that engineer is licensed in the State in which Project is located.
B. Welding certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design stairs,
walkways, and railings, including attachment to building construction.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing
loads in addition to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360.
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings, including attachment to building
construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1 . Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119—Page 2

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.
ft..
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and
surface temperature changes.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material
surfaces.
D. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Component Importance Factor: 1.25
2.02 METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D.
C. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A36/A36M or steel strip,
ASTM A1011/A1011 M or ASTM A1018/A1018M.
D. Steel Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510/A510M.
E. Aluminum Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM B221 extruded aluminum, alloys as
follows:
1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6, for bearing bars of gratings and shapes.
2. 6061-T1, for grating crossbars.
F. Steel Tubing for Railings: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed) or
ASTM A513/A513M.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
G. Steel Pipe for Railings: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard
Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by
structural loads.
H. Provide galvanized finish for all installations.
I. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond pattern, 2-inch woven-wire
mesh, made from 0.135-inch nominal-diameter steel wire complying with
ASTM A510/A510M.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119-Page 3

J. Welded-Wire Mesh: Diamond pattern, 2-inch welded-wire mesh, made from
0.236-inch nominal-diameter steel wire complying with ASTM A510/A51 OM.
K. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron,
ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Cast-Abrasive Nosings: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish
consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-
plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or
ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls.
1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of
type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring
railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding
design loads.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to
comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated:
Alloy Group
1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, A T ASTM F594.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000"Painting"
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal
modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1 . Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from
zinc-rich primer.
C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-
coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119—Page 4

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with
ASTM A780/A780M and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-
packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout; recommended by manufacturer for
exterior use; noncorrosive and non-staining; mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.05 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and
anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Assemble stairs and railings in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately.
1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise
indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #4 - Good quality, uniform
undressed weld with minimal splatter.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119-Page 5

1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated.
2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
3. Fabricate joints that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
4. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally.
2.06 FABRICATION OF STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual,"
for Industrial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.
a. Stringer Size: As required to comply with "Performance
Requirements"Article.
b. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
c. Finish: Galvanized.
2. Construct platforms and tread supports of steel channel headers and
miscellaneous framing members as required to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article.
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel framing.
b. Finish: Galvanized.
3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to
stringers and headers.
4. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting
struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing
masonry.
C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown
from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar
Grating Manual."
1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with and
crossbars at 4 inches o.c.
2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with openings in
gratings no more than 5/16 inch in least dimension.
a. Surface: Serrated.
b. Finish: Galvanized.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119—Page 6

3. Fabricate grating treads with cast-abrasive nosing and with steel angle or
steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections.
a. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.
4. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads.
a. Secure grating to platform framing by welding.
D. Risers: Open.
E. Toe Plates: Provide toe plates around openings and at edge of open-sided
floors and platforms, and at open ends and open back edges of treads.
1. Material and Finish: Steel plate to match finish of other steel items.
2. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.07 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGS
A. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of member, post
spacings, wall bracket spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to
withstand indicated loads.
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch-diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch-
square posts.
2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-5/8-inch-diameter intermediate rails spaced
less than 12 inches clear.
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections.
1. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that
excludes water.
a. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally.
2. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose.
3. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
5. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
6. Remove flux immediately.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119-Page 7

7. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards"
for Finish #4 - Good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter
as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.
C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
1. As detailed.
2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
3. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
4. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow
fittings of radius indicated.
5. By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required.
1. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling,
twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
components.
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise
indicated.
1 . Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4
inch or less.
G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures,
flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components
and for attaching to other work.
1. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or
masonry work.
2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners,
sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components.
3. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings,
brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in
exterior masonry and concrete construction.
4. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage
and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to
finished wall surface.
I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant
material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to
structural supports.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119—Page 8

1. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing
area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
2.08 FINISHES
A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with
ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M
for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere
with paint adhesion.
2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless
indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing
off smooth.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
products:
1. Exterior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except
those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or
masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint
Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners
where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction.
1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-
bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119—Page 9

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation,
measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates
cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of
bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces.
a. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.
b. Set steel-stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts.
c. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts.
d. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to
ensure that no voids remain.
1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.
2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for
shrinkage-resistant grouts.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built
into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field
connections.
3. Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General"Article.
3.02 INSTALLING RAILINGS
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at
abutting joints with tight, hairline joints.
1 . Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design
loads.
2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations
from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4
inch in 12 feet.
4. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119—Page 10

a. Anchor posts to steel by welding or bolting to steel supporting
members.
b. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round
flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with post-installed
anchors and bolts.
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.
1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to
support structural loads.
2. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with
performance requirements.
3.03 REPAIR
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with
same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section
099000 "Painting"
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
END OF SECTION 055119
June 2021 Project#21.00317 055119-Page 11

SECTION 099000 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings andgeneralprovisions of the Contract, includingModified General and
9
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes preparation of all surfaces to be painted, all field painting,
the repairs to the shop priming or finish coats of paint, and the furnishing and
installation of pipe markers, signs and similar items. In general, all equipment
furnished with standard shop finishes shall be field painted, except graphic
panels, electrical equipment, instruments, and similar items with baked-on
enamel finishes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU — Concrete Masonry Unit
B. CSP — Concrete Standard Profile
C. DFT — Dry Film Thickness
D. ICRI — International Concrete Repair Institute
E. NACE — National Association of Corrosion Engineers
F. SF — Square Foot or Square Feet
G. SSPC — Steel Structures Painting Council (now known as the Society for
Protective Coatings)
H. °F — Degrees Fahrenheit
1.4 CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor shall have five (5) years practical experience and successful
history in the application of specified products in similar projects. They shall
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 1

substantiate this requirement by furnishing a list of references and job
completions.
B. Applicator must successfully demonstrate to the product manufacturer the ability
to apply the material correctly and within the confines of the specifications. The
Contractor must provide a letter from the manufacturer stating their acceptance
of the Contactor for this project to apply these products.
C. The Contractor shall be expected to provide tools and equipment in first class
working order.
D. All directions with respect to temperature, humidity, surface preparation, mixing
ratios, induction times, recoat times, and touch upprocedures as set forth bythe
manufacturer shall be adhered to exactly. Nothing in these specifications shall
be deemed to cancel or supersede the directions of the coatings manufacturer,
except where specific film thickness or spreading rates are set forth. Deviations
between these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations
regarding film thickness shall be resolved utilizing the thicker of the indicated
coating thickness.
E. No additional compensation will be made for equipment required to maintain
proper environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity) such as portable
heaters or dehumidifiers.
F. The Contractor shall be expected to provide and be familiar with the use of film
thickness gauges (wet and dry), holiday detectors, sling psychrometer, and such
other instruments or gauges or other equipment as may be required to comply
with the manufacturer's instructions.
G. The Contractor shall possess the applicable license(s) to perform the work as
herein described and as specified by Local, State and Federal laws. The
Contractor shall include his license number(s) on the front of the envelope
containing his bid.
H. The Contractor shall submit certification from the paint manufacturer indicating
that the quantity of each coating purchased was sufficient to properly coat all
surfaces. Such certification shall indicate square footage quantities provided to
the manufacturer and the Owner by the Contractor.
I. The Contractor shall provide a site mock up with each paint system as a
representative of how the systems shall be installed and their final appearance
(to include color, sheen, texture etc), which is to be approved by the Engineer
before any work is started. For overcoat projects this mock up shall be used to
test for adequate adhesion. This approved mock up shall be the quality standard
for the rest of the project. This mock up location, size and other job specifics
needs shall be detailed by the Engineer.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 2

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. All field painting shall be under the direct and complete control of the
Contractor and only skilled painters shall be used in the work. All paint shall
be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as
directed. Film thickness of applied paint shall be at least equal to the value
determined by the number of coats multiplied by the thickness per coat
schedule on the plans for specific paint products. If other paint products are
approved, the thickness per coat shall be as determined by the Engineer.
A film thickness indicator will be used by the Engineer to determine
compliance with the specifications. When field coats of paint are to be
applied to shop painted or shop primed surfaces, care shall be taken to
insure that only compatible paints are used.
2. Pans or pails of adequate capacity shall be used for mixing paints or similar
materials. All paint shall be thoroughly stirred before being taken from the
containers and all ready mixed paint shall be applied exactly as received
from the manufacturer and no thinner or drier shall be added except as
specified, permitted or directed by the Engineer. Successive coats of paint
shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily distinguishable from each
other with the final undercoat tinted to the approximate shade of the finished
coat.
3. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly
manner so as to facilitate inspection. All materials that receive surface
preparation shall receive the primer application the same day that the
surface preparation is performed and before flash rusting occurs. Surfaces
of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned
and painted before erection.
4. In general, aluminum, stainless steel, copper, and bronze work shall not be
field painted. Care shall be taken not to paint shafts, grease fittings,
nameplates, machined parts, sight glasses, etc.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 of these
specifications.
B. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of six (6) copies of complete shop
drawings to the Engineer for approval. Shop drawings shall include a coating
schedule, manufacturer's data sheets for all coatings, and color charts. All colors
shall be selected by the Owner.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 3

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All paint shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer with at least ten (10)
years experience in the manufacture of industrial grade coatings. Paint shall be
as manufactured by Carboline, Sherwin-Williams, Tnemec, or approved equal.
B. General: Quality assurance procedures and practices shall be utilized to monitor
all phases of surface preparation, application, and inspection throughout the
duration of the project. Procedures or practices not specifically defined herein
may be utilized provided they meet recognized and accepted professional
standards and are r v approved by the Engineer.
C. Surface Preparation: Surface preparation will be based upon comparison with:
"Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces", SSPC Vis
1 and ASTM D 2200; "Standard Methods of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on
Painted Steel Surfaces" SSPC Vis 2 and ASTM D 610; "Visual Standard for
Surfaces of New Steel Air blast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive" or "Guideline for
Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coating and
Polymer Overlays" and ICRI 310.2 Surface Profile Replica Chips.
D. Application: No coating or paint shall be applied: When the surrounding air
temperature or the temperature of the surface to be coated is below the minimum
required temperature for the specified product; to wet or damp surfaces or in fog
or mist; when the temperature is less than 5 degrees F. above the dew point;
when the air temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F. within six hours
after application of coating. Dew point shall be measured by use of an instrument
such as a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce
Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables. If above conditions are prevalent,
coating or painting shall be delayed or postponed until conditions are favorable.
The day's coating or painting shall be completed in time to permit the film
sufficient drying time prior to damage by atmospheric conditions. No coatings
shall be applied in a dust-laden environment.
E. Thickness and Holiday Checking: Thickness of coatings and paint shall be
checked with a non-destructive, magnetic type thickness gauge. The integrity of
coated interior surfaces shall be tested with an approved inspection device. Non-
destructive holiday detectors shall not exceed the voltage recommended by the
manufacturer of the coating system. All holiday testing shall be conducted in
accordance with NACE SP 0188. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils (250
microns and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak
Photo Flo, may be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. All
pinholes shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations, and retested. No pinholes or other irregularities will be
permitted in the final coating.
F. Inspection Devices: The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of coating
and painting, inspection devices in good working condition for detection of
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000-Page 4

holidays and measurement of dry film thickness of coating and paint. The
Contractor shall also furnish U.S. Department of Commerce; National Bureau of
Standard certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of dry film
thickness gauges and certified instrumentation to test accuracy of holiday
detectors.
G. All necessary testing equipment shall be made available for the Engineer's use
at all times until final acceptance of application. Holiday detection devices shall
be operated in the presence of the Engineer.
H. A NACE certified technical representative from the paint manufacturer shall visit
the job site to support the Contractor's personnel, the Owner and/or the Engineer
as needed and/or requested. Visits shall be made as needed help to assure the
quality of the materials and workmanship.
1.8 SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In accordance with requirements set forth by regulatory agencies
applicable to the construction industry and manufacturer's printed instructions
and appropriate technical bulletins and manuals, the Contractor shall provide and
require use of personnel protective lifesaving equipment for persons working on
or about the project site.
B. Head and Face Protection and Respiratory Devices: Equipment shall include
protective helmets, which shall be worn by all persons while in the vicinity of the
work. In addition, workers engaged in or near the work during sandblasting shall
wear eye and face protection devices and air purifying halfmask or mouthpiece
respirators with appropriate filters. Barrier creams shall be used on any exposed
areas of skin.
C. Ventilation: Where ventilation is used to control hazardous exposure, all
equipment shall be explosion proof. Ventilation shall reduce the concentration of
air contaminant to the degree a hazard does not exist. Air circulation and
exhausting of solvent vapors shall be continued until coatings have fully cured.
D. Sound Levels: Whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds maximum
allowable sound levels, the Contractor shall provide and require the use of
approved ear protective devices.
E. Illumination: Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress,
including explosion proof lights and electrical equipment. Illumination of the work
area shall be in accordance with SSPC Technology Guide No. 12 "Guide for
Illumination of Industrial Painting Projects" for general work, surface preparation
application and inspection.
F. Confined Space: When applicable it is mandatory that all work be performed in
compliance with OSHA'S rules and regulations for working in confined space.
Rev. 11/1612021 Project#18.00342 099000-Page 5

Atmospheres within confined spaces as defined by the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration are classified as being either a Class A, Class B or Class
C environment.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All materials to be used in the work, including paints, stains, varnishes, thinners,
etc. shall be delivered to the site in their original unbroken containers. All
ingredients shall be prepared, packed, labeled, and guaranteed by the
manufacturer. All materials shall be stored in enclosed structures to protect them
from weather and excessive heat or cold. Flammable coatings or paint must be
stored in accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer or not stored
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions shall be rejected.
B. Paint storage space shall be kept clean at all times and every precaution shall be
taken to avoid fire hazards.
C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas
with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 50°F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The work covered by this Section shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year
from the date of final acceptance against defective materials and faulty
workmanship. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the
work during the guaranty period, the affected work shall be repaired or replaced
promptly at the expense of the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. All products shall be from a single manufacturer. Although the coatings listed in
the general paint schedule include products from several manufacturers for the
purpose of specifying the type of coating system, a single manufacturer shall be
selected by the Contractor for all products throughout the project. All paint
products shall be as manufactured by Carboline, Sherwin-Williams, Tnemec, or
approved equal.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000-Page 6

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
material for use within a selectedpaint system that are compatible with
A. Provide y p
one another and the substrates indicated, under the conditions of service and
application as recommended by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. All finish colors except as noted in this Specification for Pipelines shall be
selected by the Owner prior to application by the Contractor. Color chips shall
be submitted to the Engineer for color selection. From time to time, as the
Engineer may direct analyses of paint and oil, or pigment samples may be made
and any samples that are found not complying with these specifications may be
cause for rejection of the paint. The cost of the analyses and the cost of supplying
paint that complies with these specifications shall be at the Contractor's expense.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All surface preparation, coating and painting shall conform to applicable
standards of the Steel Structures Painting Council, NACE, ICRI and the
manufacturer's printed instructions. Material applied prior to approval of the
surface by the Engineer shall be removed and reapplied to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
B. All work shall be performed by skilled craftsmen qualified to perform the required
work in a manner comparable with the best standards of practice. Continuity of
personnel shall be maintained and transfers of key personnel shall be
coordinated with the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall provide an English speaking supervisor at the work site at
all times.
D. Dust, dirt, oil, grease or any foreign matter that will affect the adhesion or
durability of the finish must be removed by washing with clean rags dipped in an
approved cleaning solvent and wiped dry with clean rags.
E. The Contractor's coating and painting equipment shall be designed for
application of materials specified and shall be maintained in first class working
condition. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water and
oils from the air.
F. Application of the first coat shall follow immediately after surface preparation and
cleaning and before rust bloom or flash rusting occurs. Any cleaned areas not
receiving first coat within this period shall be recleaned prior to application of first
coat.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000-Page 7

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for temperature, maximum moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified below and shall be clean
and dry before painting. The maximum moisture content of substrates when
measured with an electronic moisture meter shall be as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent
4. Plaster: 12 percent
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are clean and dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
3.3 CONTAINMENT AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS DEBRIS AND/OR PAINT
CHIPS (AS NECESSARY)
A. All work shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety & Health Standards 29 CFR
1910.1025.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to make provisions to contain any cleaning
residue and/or old paint to within the property and the required containment.
Blast cleaning operations shall not begin until the containment method is
approved by the Owner's representative.
C. All debris and blast related media shall be collected at the end of each workday.
All debris shall be placed in approved containers for proper disposal.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, disposal, and costs required
for the disposal of any and all debris generated as part of this contract. Contractor
shall take positive steps to ensure that solid and hazardous waste including used
solvent and solvent rags is separated from other debris.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 8

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for the certified
laboratory test report to determine if the residue generated during the blasting
and paint removal operations on the structure exceeds "leachable" limits for lead,
arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, mercury, selenium, and silver as
determined by EPA's Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). A copy
of the certified report shall be furnished to the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall sandblast a representative area and collect the debris
generated. The Contractor shall also collect a representative sample of old paint
chips from the structure. Samples shall be collected in the presence of the Owner
or Engineer and sent to a laboratory for analysis. The Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer a certified test report of the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching
Procedure (TCLP) documenting the results of a representative random sample
taken from the debris and paint chips. The certified report shall state that the
results are for the specific job. Should the result exceed any of the EPA maximum
limits, the Contractor shall apply for an EPA identification number for a generator
of hazardous waste on Notification Form 8700 12. Application and disposal of
pp p
debris generated shall be through the appropriate local, state or federal officials.
G. Should the results of the certified test be less than the EPA maximum limit the
Contractor shall dispose of the debris generated in an approved landfill as
directed by Environmental Control and the appropriate local, state or federal
officials.
H. If lead is present, the entire structure shall be totally contained with a rigid
containment system. Submit a detailed plan for Lead Abatement Plan to conform
to OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.1025. Provide a containment system which
allows for the efficient containment of environmentally sensitive waste, dust,
fumes, and paint debris that will be generated during the blasting operations. The
containment systems must be a proven method used previously on similar
projects with acceptable results. The Contractor shall comply with the following:
1. Provide a containment system that meets the requirements of SSPC Guide
61 for Class 3 containment with Class A-2 Flexible Walls, Class B-1
Impermeable Walls, Class C-2 Flexible Supports, Class D-1 Full Joint
Seals, Class E-2 Entryway with Overlapping Door, Class G-1 Forced Air
Flow, and Class J-1 Exhaust Dust Filtration.
2. Contractor must submit a written containment and collection of debris plan.
3. The containment must be designed and erected in such a manner that no
damaging loads are imposed by the containment and collection systems of
the structure to be painted.
4. The containment system will be evaluated by ambient air monitoring for
lead. Samples will be taken at three different locations based around the
site. Emissions of lead may not exceed a time weight average of 5
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 9

micrograms per cubic meter outside the containment. The Contractor may
not continue blasting until initial test results indicating that emissions are
below the allowable limit are conveyed to the Engineer.
5. Provide ventilation as described below:
a. The Contractor must provide forced air ventilation during all coating
removal, debris removal, and painting operation performed on the
structure.
b. The ventilation by forced air system must be sufficient to provide
adequate visibility and limit worker lead dust exposure. The minimum
required ventilation shall be 40,000 CFM. Should worker exposure to
lead dust become excessive or visibility drop to an unacceptable level,
then reconfiguration of the ventilation system requiring the use of
flexible and/or rigid duct work and additional forced air ventilation
capacity shall be required.
c. All ventilation equipment shall be explosion proof.
d. The exhaust ventilation system will be evaluated by ambient air
monitoring. Emissions above a time weighted average of 5
micrograms per cubic meter shall be cause for blasting operation shut
down and reevaluation of the exhaust and ventilation system.
Modifications to the containment shall be made until compliance is
achieved.
3.4 PREPARATION
A. All parties, to include the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, installer, any subs and
the product manufacture, shall meet prior to any work is started to review the
specification and discuss job specific expectations, needs and requirements.
B. Comply with all manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
C. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and
painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied
protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Clean all substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt,
debris, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000-Page 10

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible
primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
E. All surface preparation f e shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the
surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council and
NACE.
1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil and other
contaminants by use of solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam
cleaning or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or
cleaning action. This standard is an integral part of all other standards, shall
precede any other surface preparation described herein, and is not required
to be referenced separately.
2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale
and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by hand chipping,
scraping, sanding and wire brushing.
3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust' loose mill scale
and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by power wire
brushing, power impact tools or power sanders.
4. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7/NACE 4): Brush-off blast cleaned
surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil,
grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating. Tightly
adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on the surface. Mill scale,
rust, and coating are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed
by lifting with a dull putty knife after abrasive blast cleaning has been
performed.
5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Blast cleaning until at
least 66 percent of unit area is free or all visible residues.
6. Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10/NACE 2): Blast cleaning to nearly
white metal cleanliness, until at least 95 percent of unit area is free of all
visible residues.
7. Surface Preparation of Concrete (SSPC-SP13/NACE 6): This standard
gives requirements for surface preparation of concrete by mechanical,
chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded protective
coating or lining systems.
8. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal (SSPC-SP11): This standard covers
the requirements for power tool cleaning to produce a bare metal surface
and to retain or produce a minimum 25 micrometer (1.0 mil) surface profile.
This standard is suitable where a roughened, clean, bare metal surface is
required, but where abrasive blasting is not feasible or permissible.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 11

F. Blast cleaningfor all surfaces shall be bydrymethod unless otherwisedirected.
G. Particle size of abrasives used in blast cleaning shall be that which will produce
a 1.5 — 2.0 mil (37.5 microns - 50.0- microns) surface profile or in accordance
with recommendations of the manufacturer of the specified coating or paint
system to be applied.
H. Abrasive used in blast cleaning operations shall be new, washed, graded and
free of contaminants that would interfere with adhesion of coating or paint and
shall not be reused unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
I. During blast cleaning operations, caution shall be exercised to insure that
surrounding existing coatings or paint are not exposed to abrasion from blast
cleaning.
J. The Contractor shall keep the area of his work and the surrounding environment
in a clean condition. He shall not permit blasting materials to accumulate as to
constitute a nuisance or hazard to the accomplishment of the work, the operation
of the existing facilities, or nuisance to the surrounding environment.
K. Blast cleaned surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of specified coatings
or paint. No coatings or paint shall be applied over damp or moist surfaces.
L. Specific Surface Preparation: Surface preparation for the specific system shall
be as specified herein.
3.5 APPLICATION
A. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions based on the materials being coated and their exposure conditions.
1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with
prime coat only.
B. Protective coverings or drop cloths shall be used to protect floors, fixtures, and
equipment. Care shall be exercised to prevent coatings or paint from being
spattered onto surfaces that are not to be coated or painted. Surfaces from which
materials cannot be removed satisfactorily shall be recoated or repainted as
required to produce a finish satisfactory to the Engineer.
C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if
multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color
of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish
each separate coat.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 12

D. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats
until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
E. Each application of coating or paint shall be applied evenly, free of brush marks,
sags, runs, with no evidence of poor workmanship. Care shall be exercised to
avoid lapping on glass or hardware. Coatings and paints shall be sharply cut to
lines. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes. All coats herein
specified are in addition to shop or other coats specified to be applied by other
trades.
F. All welds, edges and other irregular surfaces shall receive a brush coat of the
specified product prior to application of the first complete coat.
G. All items listed below shall be painted unless specifically noted otherwise. Items
which come from the manufacturer completely painted shall be given a single
coat of machinery enamel or shall be "touched-up" only as directed by the
Engineer.
H. Where appropriate, all solvent vapors shall be completely removed by suction
type exhaust fans and blowers before placing in operating service.
I. Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, all exposed pipelines and equipment
shall be painted and identified as follows:
Item Color
Equipment & Pumps Imperial Blue
Water Lines
Raw or Recycled Water Olive Green
Settled or Clarified Aqua
Finished or Potable Water Dark Blue
Non-Potable Water Light Gray With Yellow Band
Chemical Lines
Alum or Primary Coagulant Orange
Ammonia White
Carbon Slurry Black
Caustic Yellow with Green Band
Chlorine (Gas and Solution) Yellow
Chlorine Dioxide Yellow with Violet Band
Fluoride Light Blue with Red Band
Lime Slurry Light Green
Ozone Yellow with Orange Band
Phosphate Compounds Light Green with Red Band
Polymers or Coagulant Aids Orange with Green Band
Potassium Permanganate Violet
Soda Ash Light Green with Orange Band
Sulfuric Acid Yellow with Red Band
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000-Page 13

Sulfur Dioxide Light Green with Yellow Band
All PVC Chemical Lines Unpainted with Stenciled Labels
Waste Lines
Backwash Waste Light Brown
Sludge Dark Brown
Sewer (Sanitary or Other) Dark Gray
Other
Chlorine Gas Safety Yellow
Compressed Air Dark Green
Natural Gas Safety Red
J. All exposed pipes shall have stenciled arrows pointing in the direction of flow,
with fluid labels every 10'-0" or at convenient locations.
K. General:
1. In general, equipment previously shop painted with the Manufacturer's
standard paint system shall be repainted with colors to suit the area of
installation. The Engineer may, at his option, require that certain equipment
not be painted. The Contractor shall verify that all field coatings are
compatible with the shop coatings.
2. Imperfections and scratches on equipment not repainted shall be touched
up with matching paint provided by the Equipment Manufacturer.
3. Where more than one coat of paint is required, the undercoats shall be a
shade lighter than succeeding coats to insure complete coverage.
4. Colors shall be as selected by the Owner.
5. Aluminum and stainless steel surfaces shall not be painted unless
specifically indicated in the specifications or drawings.
6. All pipes and other metals that have been dipped in tar or bituminous
products shall receive two (2) coats of an anti-bleeding sealer in place of
priming coat.
7. Bronze and brass shall not be painted unless specifically required or
requested by the Engineer. Galvanized metal and the other metals, which
require painting shall receive one (1) coat of a vinyl wash primer before
prime painting.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 14

3.6 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. NOTE: Contractor shall select all coating systems for the entire project from a
single manufacturer. Approved equal systems may be utilized if approved by the
Engineer.
B. Exterior Concrete Stain:
1. All interior and exterior exposed concrete block walls above and below
grade shall be painted.
a. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, no cracks or nail heads.
b. Coating system:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 600 Carboguard 890 Carbothane 133 HB
(at 60-70 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Cement-Plex 875 Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646
(at 75 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 607 Prime-A- Series 607 Conformal
Tnemec Pell Plus (at 75-100 Stain N/A
SF/Gallon) (at 75-100 SF/Gallon)
C. Exterior Concrete:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete. Power wash with 5,000 psi using the rotating "turbo" nozzle, to
remove all loose paint, dirt, dust, mildew and all other foreign matter. The
surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 600 Carboguard 890 Carbothane 133 HB
(at 60-70 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Loxon Conditioner Loxon XP Loxon XP
Sherwin-Williams A24-100 (at 200-300 (at 6.4-8.3 mils DFT) (at 6.4-8.3 mils DFT)
SF/Gallon)
Series 180 Tneme-
Series 180 Tneme-Crete
Tnemec Crete (at 4.0-6.0 mils N/A
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
DFT)
D. Interior Concrete:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 3. The surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 15

System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 600 Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 60-70 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Kem Cati Coat Epoxy Pro Industrial HB Water Pro Industrial HB Water
Sherwin-Williams filler B42 Series (at 10.0- Based Catalyzed Epoxy Based Catalyzed Epoxy
20.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 1254 EpoxoBlock Series 113 H.B. Tneme- Series 113 H.B. Tneme-
Tnemec (at 75 SF/Gal) Tufcoat Tufcoat
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
E. Concrete Floors: (All new concrete floors shall be coated gray unless otherwise
indicated.)
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 3. The surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 1340 WB Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corobond 100 Cor-Cote HP Cor-Cote HP
(at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Series 201 Epoxoprime Series 280 Tneme- Series 248 Everthane
Tnemec (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) Glaze (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
(at 8.0-12.0 mils DFT)
F. Concrete (Potable or Non-Potable Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 3. Fill voids, bugholes, and surface imperfections with
recommended filler per manufacturer recommendation. The surface must
be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 510 Carboguard 891 Carboguard 891
(at 1/8 inch) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corobond 300 (at Macropoxy 646 PW Macropoxy 646 PW
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 218 MortarClad Series N140 Pota-Pox Series N140 Pota-Pox
Tnemec to fill bugholes, voids, Plus Plus
surface imperfections up (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-8.0 mils OFT)
to 1/4 inch
G. Concrete (Wastewater Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 3. Fill voids, bugholes, and surface imperfections with
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 16

recommended filler per manufacturer recommendation. The surface must
be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 510 Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 1/8 inch) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corobond 300 (at Corcote SC Plus (at 40.0- Corcote SC Plus (at
125.0 mils DFT) 40.0-125.0 mils DFT)
Series 218 MortarClad
to fill bugholes, voids. Series 141 (at 12.0-16.0
Tnemec N/A
surface imperfections mils DFT)
up to 1/4 inch
H. Existing Concrete Process Basin — Wastewater Immersion
1. Surface SSPC-SP 13/ NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete to a
minimum ICRI CSP 3 Surface Profile. Resurface with cementitous
resurfacing compound as recommended by manufacturer. (Series 215
Surfacing Epoxy, Series 217 Mortarcrete, Series 218-1000 Mortarclad or
equals depending on depth of repair and application needs.) The surface
must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Series N69 Hi-Build Series 141 Expoxoline (at
Tnemec Epoxoline II (at 4.0-6.0 N/A
12.0-18.0 mils DFT)
mils DFT)
I. Existing Concrete Process Basin — Exterior Exposed
1. SSPC-SP 13/ NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete. Resurface (if
needed) with cementitous resurfacing compound as recommended by
manufacturer (Series 215 Surfacing Epoxy, Series 217 Mortarcrete, Series
218-1000 Mortarclad or equals depending on depth of repair and application
needs.) For cracks larger than 1/64", use Tnemec Series 152 Tneme-Tape
or equal per manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Series 151 Elasto-Grip Series 156 Eviro-Crete Series 156 Eviro-Crete
Tnemec FC (at 0.7-1.5 mils (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
DFT)
J. Exposed Steel:
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 17

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6/NACE3 Commercial blast cleaning. The
surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
stem:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 890 Carbothane 133 HB N/A
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corothane 1 Mio Zinc Macropoxy 646 FC WB Acrolon 100
(at 3.0-4.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-4.0 mils DFT)
Series 1 Omnithane Series N69 Hi-Build Series 73 Endurashield
Tnemec at 2.5-3.5 mils DFT) Epoxoline 2
( (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
K. Steel (Potable or Non Potable Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10/NACE2 Near-white blast cleaning with a
minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. The surface must be clean and
dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 60 Carboguard 891 Carboguard 891
(at 4.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corothane I Galvapac Macropoxy 646 PW Macropoxy 646 PW
(at 3.0-4.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 94 H2O Hydro- Series N140 Pota-Pox Series N140 Pota-Pox
Tnemec Zinc (at 2.5-3.5 mils Plus Plus
DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 18

L. Steel (Wastewater Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10/NACE2 Near-white blast cleaning with a
minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. The surface must be clean and
dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 60 Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 4.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams N/A SherGlass FF SherGlass FF
(at 8.0-20.0 mils DFT) (at 8.0-20.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane (at Series 141 (at 12.0-16.0 N/A
2.5-3.5 mils DFT) mils DFT)
M. Exposed Galvanized Steel:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove all soluble and insoluble contaminants and
corrosion. Remove any storage stains per Section 6.2 of ASTM D6386.
Sweep (Abrasive) Blasting per SSPC SP-16 to achieve a uniform anchor
profile (1.0 - 2.0 mils). SSPC SP-16
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Rustbond Carbothane 133 HB Carbothane 133 HB
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 FC WB Acrolon 100 N/A
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-4.0 mils DFT)
Series N69 Hi-Build Series 73 Endurashield
Tnemec Epoxoline II (at 4-6 mils N/A
(at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
DFT)
N. Interior Drywall:
1. Surface Preparation: The surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 120 Carbocrylic 3359 Carbocrylic 3359
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
PrepRite 200 Water-Based Tile Clad Pro Industrial HB Water
Sherwin-Williams Based Catalyzed Epoxy
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 51 PVA Sealer Series 1029 Enduratone Series 1029 Enduratone
(at 1-2 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
O. Wood:
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 19

1. Surface Preparation: The surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 120 Carbocrylic 3359 Carbocrylic 3359
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams PrepRite DTM Acrylic Coating DTM Acrylic Coating
(at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 10 Tnemec Primer Series 1028 Enduratone Series 1028 Enduratone
(at 2.0-3.5 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
3. Finish: Semi-Gloss
P. Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe, Valves, and Fittings (above and below grade)
1. Interior (above grade)
a. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale; blast clean per
SSPC-SP5/NACE1 White blast cleaning with a minimum of 3.0 mils of
surface profile. Surface must be clean and dry before painting.
b. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Final
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 60 (at 4.0 mils DFT) Carbothane 133 HB (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT) Macropoxy 646 (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series N69 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Series N69 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
2. Exterior (below grade)
a. Surface Preparation: None.
b. Paint system: Manufacturer's factory paint system as specified
elsewhere.
3. Exterior (submerged)
a. Surface Preparation: Blast clean per SSPC-SP10 clean and dry
(except galvanized steel piping). Surface profile requirements shall
be as recommended on manufacturer's product data sheets.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 20

b. Coating System:
stem:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 890 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Carboguard 890 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) Macropoxy 646 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series N69 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Series N69 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following
procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period
when paints are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be
taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with
product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show
materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor
shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing,
and repaint surfaces which were painted with rejected materials. Contractor
will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted
surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Coating or paint
spots and oil or stains on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the jobsite
cleaned. All damage to surfaces resulting from the work of this section shall be
cleaned, repaired, or refinished to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to
the Owner.
C. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. All staging, scaffolding, and
containers shall be removed from the site.
D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing,
as approved by Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 21

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.9 SPARE PAINT
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) gallon of all types and colors of paint to the
Owner for future touch-up painting.
END OF SECTION 099000
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#18.00342 099000—Page 22

SECTION 223120 SUBMERSIBLE NON-CLOG SEWAGE PUMP
STATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all parts, labor, equipment,
materials and appliances and performing all operations for the installation of non-
clog, motor-driven submersible sewage pumps, controls and accessories as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein including, but not limited to wet
well, valve vault, pumps, controls, electrical components, valves, piping, level
control system and other accessories.
B. Submersible pumps with motors under this section shall be installed on lift-out
rail systems, and shall include access hatch, controls, piping, valves and other
necessary appurtenances as shown on the drawings and in accordance with
the specifications herein stated.
C. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
D. All pumps furnished shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
E. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Sections for electrical requirements. Refer to Section 262923
for VFD and harmonic filtering requirements.
2. Division 32 Section "Fencing" for applications in site construction of
sewage pump stations.
3. Division 33 Sections "Sanitary Sewer Pipe and Appurtenances" and
"Exposed Piping" for applications in sewage pump stations.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Pump Design: Each pump shall be of the submersible non-clog type with 2-
vane enclosed impeller and submersible motor. Pump shall be designed for
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 1

automatic connection to the discharge connection elbow, guided by no less
than two guide bars extending from the top of the station to the discharge
elbow.
B. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Location: Etowah WWTP Influent Pump Station
a. Total Station Capacity: 313 gpm
b. Number of Pumps: 2 (1 operating, 1 standby).
c. Operating Conditions:
d. Material to be Pumped: raw wastewater from collection system
e. Pumping conditions for each pump shall be as follows:
Design Operating Point (single pump)
313 gpm @ 45 feet TDH
Secondary Design Operating Point (single pump on VFD)
87 gpm @ 37 feet TDH
Minimum Shutoff Head 65 feet
Minimum Efficiency at Design Point 50%
Maximum Motor Power 10 hp
Maximum Speed 1800 rpm
Power Requirement 460 Volt / 60 Hz / 3-Phase
f. Specifications:
1) Type: Non-Clog Submersible.
2) Minimum Solids Handling Capability: 3 inch diameter.
3) Pump Size: 4 inch.
4) Discharge Elbow Size: 3 Inch by 4 Inch.
5) Riser Pipe Size:4 Inch.
g. Motor Data:
1) Motor Type: Variable Speed.
2) Max. Horsepower: 10 HP.
3) Max. Speed:1800 RPM.
4) Voltage: 460 Volts.
5) Phases: 3.
6) Hertz:60.
7) All pumps (constant or variable speed) shall be provided with
inverter duty motors suitable for operating on pulse-width
modulation (PWM) type adjustable frequency drives.
8) Thermal and Moisture Protection: Required.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include wet well, pump and
appurtenance drawings, construction details, material descriptions, installation
guidelines, technical manuals, and dimensions of individual components.
onents.p
Include rated capacities, pump curves, operating characteristics, electrical
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 2

characteristics, control data, spare parts lists, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B. Structural Drawings: Detailed drawing and product submittals for the pre-cast
concrete structure and accessories shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. Submitted drawings shall be certified by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the state where the project is located.
C. Design Computations: Design and buoyancy computations for the precast
concrete foundation, walls, roof, and accessories shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Design computations shall be certified by a Professional
Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located.
D. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
E. Harmonic study as required in Section 262923.
F. Verification of Pumping Application: As part of the shop drawing submittal, the
manufacturer shall supply a letter certifying that the manufacturer has reviewed
the Contract drawings and specifications, including all addenda, and that the
equipment and related accessories included in the shop drawing submittal are
suitable for installation in the pumping application(s) proposed for the project.
G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The manufacturer shall submit operation
and maintenance manuals for the equipment supplied in accordance with
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data".
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The pumps and all appurtenances shall be supplied by reputable
manufacturers with at least ten (10) years of experience.
B. Factory Tests:
1 . General: Each pump shall be subjected to run testing at the factory under
simulated actual field conditions to check for proper motor and pump
operation and watertightness, to check for excessive vibration, leaks, and
operation of all automatic systems. The controls shall be adjusted to start
and stop the pumps to satisfy field conditions.
2. Performance Test: For each pumping unit 10 HP and greater, a pump
performance curve shall be produced from the factory testing in accordance
with the ANSI/Hydraulic Institute standard 14.6, Grade 1 B. Provide the
Owner/Engineer the option of witnessing performance tests. The
veracity of each of these tests shall be certified and the curves shall be
identifiable by serial numbers of pumps and motors. Manufacturer shall
submit six (6) copies of certified test results for each pump to the
Engineer prior to the shipment of the pumps. Results of the shop
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 3

performance test shall meet the specified performance requirements p as
listed in this specification. Final acceptance of pumping units shall depend
upon the satisfactory operation as demonstrated by the final field tests.
3. Pump Test: The pump manufacturer shall perform the following
inspections and tests on each pump before shipment from factory:
a. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall first be
checked for compliance to the customer's purchase order.
b. Insulation Test: A motor and cable insulation test for moisture
content or insulation defects shall be made.
c. Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish correct
rotation and mechanical integrity.
d. Operational Test: The pump shall be run submerged in water to a
minimum of six (6) feet for not less than 30 minutes simulating actual
service conditions.
e. After Operational Test, the Insulation Test is to be performed again.
4. Test each pump for mechanical and electrical correctness after
installation.
5. Hydraulically test each pumping unit after installation and establish an
actual pump curve.
C. Perform field tests specified in this Section.
D. Pumps shall meet or exceed the requirements of the Hydraulic Institute.
E. The certification indicated above shall include a written statement
indicating the foregoing steps have been done with each pump and shall
be supplied to the Engineer prior to shipment of the pump.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
G. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The equipment and materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
D. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 4

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Pump Warranty: The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being supplied
to the owner against defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5)
years from the date of Owner's acceptance or 10,000 hours of operation under
the Municipal Wastewater Permanent Installation Warranty Policy. The warranty
shall be in printed form and apply to all similar units.
B. Appurtenances Warranty: All accessories and appurtenances shall be
warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1)
year from the date of Owner's acceptance.
1.8 PUMP PREQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT
A. Manufacturers wishing to supply equipment for this project must submit a
prequalification submittal for approval to the Engineer. The prequalification
submittal must be received by the Engineer at least fourteen (14) days prior to
the bid opening date to receive consideration. The submittal shall demonstrate
that the proposed equipment meets the requirements of the Contract
Specifications and Drawings. The Engineer will issue an addendum prior to the
bid date listing the approved manufacturers. The prequalification submittal shall
include, as a minimum, the following information:
1. Literature and cut sheets from manufacturer(s) describing equipment.
2. Pump operating curves.
3. Proposed motor sizes and speeds.
4. Proposed pump weights, efficiencies, bearing life, and NPSH required.
5. Dimensional information of pumps and accessories, including confirmation
that the pumps can be installed properly as shown in the Drawings.
6. Copy of warranties.
7. List of at least five (5) references for similar installations, including contact
names and current telephone numbers.
8. A written statement from the manufacturer indicating that the manufacturer
has reviewed the proposed application as detailed in the Contract
Drawings and Specifications, and that all equipment, materials and
systems proposed to be supplied are appropriate and compatible for this
specific application.
B. Note: The submittal of prequalification information does not omit the
requirement for the Contractor and manufacturers to submit complete
shop drawing submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 5

1.9 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely,
permanently, and conspicuously mounted to each individual piece of equipment
furnished under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable,
non-corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or
otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully legible.
The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall include at least
the following:
1. Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, total dynamic head, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
B. Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
C. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker shall
be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the name,
address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied the
equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local business
that can provide service and replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour
emergency service telephone number should also be included.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUMPS
A. Submersible non-clog sewage pumps shall be capable of handling raw,
unscreened sewage and be constructed of cast iron which complies with the
requirements of ASTM A48, Class 30. All pump openings and passages,
including impellers, shall be of adequate size to pass spheres at least three
inches in diameter and trash or stringy material which commonly occurs in
sanitary sewage. The casing and other components of the pump shall be large
enough at all points to pass any size solid which can pass through the impeller.
B. Impellers shall be the 2-vane non-clog enclosed type to provide an
unobstructed passage through the volute and shall be of cast iron construction
and dynamically balanced. A wear ring shall be installed at the inlet of the pump
to provide protection against wear to the impeller. Impellers shall be mounted in
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 6

a solid stainless steel motor shaft. An oil chamber and two independent
mechanical seals shall seal the motor from the pump liquid. Moisture detection
probes shall be mounted in the oil chamber which is interlocked with the motor
to shut down the pump and turn on a warning light on the motor control center
when moisture is present in the oil chamber. Thermistors mounted in the bottom
of the stator housing may be used instead of the moisture detection probes.
C. Mechanical seals shall consist of upper and lower seals. Both upper and lower
seals shall have silicon carbide faces and silicon carbide rotating faces with
stainless steel springs. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor
adjustment and shall be easily replaceable.
D. The discharge connection elbows shall be permanently installed in the wet well
along with the discharge piping. The pumps shall be automatically connected to
the discharge connection elbows when lowered into place and shall be easily
removed for inspection and service. Installation and removal of pumps shall not
require personnel to enter the wet well. Individual pump and motor removal
shall not interfere with continued operation of remaining pump(s).Sealing of the
pump units to discharge connections shall be accomplished by linear downward
motion of the pumps. Discharge connections shall have contact surfaces of
non-sparking materials. Discharge elbows shall be of cast iron with integral
bases for anchoring and supporting pumps and piping. Flanges shall conform to
the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110. The metal contact surfaces shall be of
non-sparking materials.
E. The entire pump system, including pumps, motors, pump discharge
connections, discharge elbows, guide rails, float switches and electrical cable,
and pump guides shall be designed for Class 1 , Groups C and D, Division 1 ,
hazardous locations, as defined by the National Electrical Code and shall be so
certified by an independent laboratory, so that forced wet well ventilation and
redundant cut-off switches are not required.
F. A welded, type 304 stainless steel chain of adequate size shall be permanently
attached to each pump. Provisions shall be made for attaching the upper end of
each chain to the wet well access frame and cover.
G. Each submersible sewage pump shall have the capacity, minimum efficiency,
and motor size specified herein.
H. Pumps shall be designed to be installed in such a way that solids are fed in an
upflow direction to the impeller with no feet, rails or other obstructions below
inlet.
2.2 MOTORS
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 7

A. Pump motors shall be supplied with the pump by the pump manufacturer as an
integral part of the pump assembly. Motor shall be sealed, submersible type
with a maximum rated horsepower, voltage and phases as specified herein.
B. Submersible pump motors shall be designed for Class 1, Groups C and
9p D,
Division 1 , hazardous locations as defined by the National Electrical Code and
shall be so certified by an independent laboratory. Motors shall be explosion
proof, squirrel cage induction type housed in an air or oil-filled cast iron
watertight enclosure. The enclosure shall be sealed by 0-rings and shall have
rabbet joints with a large overlap. Cable leads shall be epoxy sealed. The motor
shaft extension shall be stainless steel, impervious to the liquid and waste
materials being pumped. All external hardware including motor nameplates
shall be made of stainless steel.
C. Motors shall be NEMA Design B: insulation shall be Special Class F rated for
continuous duty in 40 degrees C liquids; shall have a 1.15 service factor; and
shall be capable of 15 starts per hour. The pump should be able to run dry
under full load continuously for extended periods of time without damage. The
pumps shall be furnished with power and control cords of sufficient length to
connect directly to the motor control center without the need for splicing cables.
D. Motors shall be sized to ensure that they are non-overloading throughout the
entire pump curve associated with this application.
E. Motor shall have two heavy duty ball bearings to support pump shaft and take
radial and thrust loads and a sleeve guide bushing directly above the lower seal
to take radial load and act as a flame path for seal chamber. Ball bearings shall
be designed for a minimum B10 life of 50,000 hours.
F. A heat sensor thermostat shall be imbedded in top of winding and be connected
in series with the motor starter coil in control box to stop motor if temperature
rises in motor to over 220 degrees F for any reason. Thermostat to reset
automatically when temperature drops to a safe limit. Motors shall also be
equipped with a moisture sensor which signals an alarm if moisture is present
between the two seals.
G. Pump motor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump applications. Cable
sizing shall conform to NEC requirements for the full load currents of the
motors.
H. Cable entry system shall consist of three separate seals. A rubber grommet that
seals both cable jackets shall be clamped onto cord by end holding cap. An "O"
ring shall seal end holding cap to bottom half of cord cap. Both cables shall
have individual conductors stripped and potted into motor end cap with epoxy
potting compound. Potting compound shall prevent wicking of water into motor
if the cable jacket becomes damaged. Cords shall withstand a pull of 150
pounds without loosening or losing integrity.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120—Page 8

2.3 LIFT-OUT RAIL SYSTEM
n verticallyinto a stationary
Rail system shall consist of a seal fittingthat mounts y
discharge casting. A simple downward motion shall connect pump and seal
fitting to the stationary discharge casting. Seal fitting shall seal with two "0"
rings and a tapered rubber seal ring into funnel of discharge case. Discharge
casting shall be furnished with flanged discharge pipe connections. Valve
casting and discharge casting shall be painted with a high quality, lead free,
alkyd enamel finish. An upper guide plate shall be attached to pump to support
lift-out fitting and guide pump on rails. Lifting lugs shall be cast into the motor
housing and a stainless steel chain and clevis shall be furnished for lifting
pump. Pump shall include a lifting bail for attachment of the stainless steel
chain. Bail shall be of sufficient size to be easily caught by a hook in the event
the chain breaks or becomes unfastened.
B. Two hold down brackets shall be provided to prevent pump and seal fitting from
rising on rails. Guide rails shall be Schedule 40, type 304 stainless steel pipe
sized based on manufacturers specification.
C. Rail support and mounting bushing shall be mounted to basin wall and shall not
be attached to basin cover or cover frame.
D. Guide rail support shall be adjustable so that perfect vertical alignment of the
rails can be obtained.
2.4 ACCESS HATCH FRAMES AND DOORS
A. Access hatch frames and covers shall be of all aluminum, watertight, non-skid,
diamond plate construction reinforced for a 300 psf live load and furnished
complete with hinges, and upper guide holder and level sensor(s) cable holder.
B. The frames shall be extruded and have type 316 stainless steel hinges and type
316 stainless steel tamper resistant bolts/locknuts. The frame shall include an
extruded aluminum trough section with an integral anchor flange on all 4 sides.
The frame shall include an EPDM gasket and a 1-1/2 inch threaded drain
coupling.
C. Door leaves shall be '/4 inch thick aluminum diamond plate reinforced for a 300
psi live load.
D. The access door shall be equipped with a type 316 stainless steel hold open
arms that automatically lock the doors in the 90 degree open position. A locking
mechanism shall be supplied for security.
E. Double leaf access doors shall include two heavy duty check chains which span
between each side of the door leaves when opened.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120—Page 9

F. The frame shall be cast into the concrete tops of the wet well and valve vault
properly positioned to facilitate efficient removal of pumps and valves. Hatch
openings shall have the minimum dimensions shown on the drawings or as
required by the pump manufacturer, whichever is greater. In no case shall
access doors be less than that necessary to service pumps, valves and fittings
within the vaults.
G. An adhesive backed vinyl material that protects the product during shipping and
installation shall cover the entire top of the frame and cover. Installation shall be
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
H. Manufacturer shall guarantee the door against defects, materials and
workmanship for a period of 10 years.
I. Frames shall be securely placed, mounted above the pump(s). Frames shall be
provided with sliding nut rails to attach the accessories required.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. All bolts, machine screws, nuts, lock washers, and other hardware used in the
assembly of discharge elbows, guide rails, pump guides, hoist chains, float
cable connectors, access frames and covers and other accessories shall be
type 304 stainless steel.
2.6 PUMP STATION STRUCTURES
A. The wet well and valve vault structures shall consist of precast concrete
sections or cast-in-place concrete of the type and size shown on the Plans. The
precast concrete sections and all valves and piping associated with the wet well
and valve vault shall conform to the requirements of Division 33 Sections
"Sanitary Sewer Pipe and Appurtenances" and "Exposed Piping", however no
steps shall be installed in the pump station wet well.
B. All wet well bases shall be monolithically poured complete with a bottom. When
indicated on the drawings, precast concrete base sections shall be provided
with extended base sections or increased bottom thickness to provide ballast to
prevent flotation. Extended bases, as required by the drawings, may be
included in the monolithic pour of the base or integrally cast as approved by the
Engineer.
C. Exposed piping inside the wet well and valve vault shall be flanged joint, ductile
iron. Stainless steel bolts shall be used on all flanged joints with anti-seize
applied to threads. Flanged pipe shall be manufactured with threaded flanges.
Bolt-on or adapter flanges are not acceptable.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 10

D. The structure shall be level and all grout work shall be smooth with a steel
trowel finish. Solid concrete fillets shall be poured to create a sump in which the
pumps sit. These fillets shall be as shown on the Plans as far as height and
slope but shall be oriented in relation to the pump installation requirements.
2.7 CONTROLS
1. The scope of work associated with the controls for each pump station shall
include, but not necessarily limited to the following:
a. UL 508 Listed Control Panel
b. 480 V, 3 phase single point power connection
c. Power distribution blocks.
d. DIN Rails.
e. Control system protection (fuses or circuit breakers).
f. Control transformer and power supplies.
g. Integral 50 KA per phase surge protection device with L-L and L-G
operating modes, UL 1449, 4th Edition listed.
h. NEMA 4X, stainless steel enclosure with pad-lockable outer hinged
door and inner hinged panel for mounting control devices (indicators
and switches).
i. Panel anti-condensation heater.
j. Panel HVAC unit sized to maintain the operating temperature of the
panel and protect against condensation.
k. PLC control system with Ethernet com port and required I/O and with
battery backup. Provide final PLC program to owner via CD.
I. Individual relays to include plug-in bases.
m. Provide an operator interface unit in each pump control panel with a
color display that is a minimum size of 10 inches, that communicates
over Ethernet. The programming for each operator interface unit
shall be copied to the owner upon completion of the warranty period.
n. Provide a VFD for each pump. Refer to 262923 "Variable Frequency
Motor controllers" for VFD. Also, provide the harmonic study and
filtering required by Section 262923 for each VFD.
o. Non-resettable elapsed time indicators for each pump.
p. Pump Station Control Description:
1) The primary control sequence will be to maintain a 'constant
level' setpoint in the wetwell utilizing a submersible pressure
transducer. When pumps are not running and the wetwell
reaches the 'pump on' level setpoint, the lead pump will be
called to run and will vary its speed to maintain a constant level
in the wetwell. If the lead pump is running at full speed and the
level continues to rise to the point that the 'high level' setpoint is
reached, an alarm shall be sent and the lag pump shall turn on
and both pumps shall run at full speed until the `pump(s) off
float switch is reached. If the lead pump is running to maintain
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120—Page 11

level and the level drops below the constant level setpoint with
the lead pump running at its' minimum speed, the lead pump
will turn off when the `pump(s) off setpoint is reached. The two
pumps in the system will alternate as lead and lag. All
setpoints shall be resettable on the control panel operator
interface.
2) The pump station will be installed with weighted float level
sensors which will function as a backup system to the pressure
transducer. There will be five (5) weighted float level sensors
for low level alarm, pump(s) off, lead pump on, lag pump on,
and high-water alarm. When the pump station is operating in
the `Auto' mode and the high level float switch is activated, the
control panel shall switch to the backup float system as the
mode of control and the pumps shall run at full speed based on
the float setpoints. The float switches shall be hard wired
through relay logic (not controlled through the PLC). The
operator shall have the capability of switching the control
system to operate exclusively with the float level sensors.
q. High level audible alarm and red LED rotating indicating beacon light
on top of panel with auto reset and silence switch.
r. HOA switch for each pump. Pump will not run in OFF. Pump will run
in HAND. Pump will run based on float levels when in AUTO. Pumps
will alternate lead-lag and standby when they are in AUTO.
s. Pump or controller failure will lockout pump and switch to single or
two pump operation.
t. Run light for each pump.
u. High temperature detection for each pump. Operation shall shut
down and lockout pump. Provide high temperature indicating light
and manual reset switch for each pump.
v. Seal failure detection for each pump. Operation shall activate alarm.
Provide seal failure indicating light for each pump.
w. 22 mm metallic LED indicating lights with engraved phenolic
functional description plate (attached with stainless steel screws).
x. 22 mm metallic switches with engraved phenolic functional
description plate (attached with stainless steel screws).
y. Provide auxiliary contacts and terminals for future connection to
remote monitoring equipment of the following conditions:
1) AC power failure.
2) Communications failure
3) Pump No. 1 fail (common alarm for high temp, overload, and
seal failure).
4) Pump No. 2 fail (common alarm for high temp, overload, and
seal failure).
5) High Level Alarm.
6) Pump No.1 Run
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 12

7) Pump No.2 Run
z. Complete wiring diagrams showing both factory and field installed
wiring.
aa. Factory labeled terminal strips for all field connections. Coordinate
labeling with wiring diagram indications.
bb. Wire and cable management ducts.
cc. One year warranty
dd. All wiring connections to be made at terminal strips (no wire nuts).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and all applicable
requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Pumps and other equipment shall be erected and installed by competent,
skilled mechanics at the exact positions and elevations shown on the Plans.
C. Anchor bolts shall be accurately placed in the concrete foundations in their
exact position and elevation by the use of templates.
D. All equipment and connecting piping shall be installed and supported in such
manner that no load from the piping will be carried by the pumps.
E. As necessary, the Contractor shall properly grout each piece of equipment after
it has been carefully aligned and leveled with steel wedges. The grout shall be
poured so as to completely fill the space between the bottom of the base of the
equipment and the top of the foundation. Grout shall be a non-shrinking type.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a factory-authorized technical
representative for two (2) days to inspect, test, adjust components, assemblies,
and equipment installations, and provide start-up and operator training. The
technical representative shall be responsible to ensure that all pumps, motors,
equipment, controls, alarms, wiring and all associated components are properly
installed and functioning properly.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120—Page 13

B. Field Testing:
1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer that all or portions of the work are
ready for testing. All testingshall be scheduled with the Engineer, who will
9 ,
coordinate with the Owner, and respond to the Contractor regarding a
mutually available date and time for the necessary testing. All testing shall
be done in the presence of the Engineer. All labor, equipment, water and
other materials, including meters and gauges, shall be furnished by the
Contractor at his own expense.
2. Each pump shall be field tested, as described below, by the
manufacturer's technical representative to demonstrate that the pump
performance meets the requirements of the drawings and specifications.
The manufacturer shall provide and install any gauges, meters or other
devices needed for the field tests.
3. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary oil, grease and other materials
and supplies for the operation of the equipment during the initial trial
operation.
4. Pump start up and testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer
and shall demonstrate conformance to the conditions shown on the
contract drawings.
C. After installation, the wet well shall be filled with clean water and allowed to
stand for 24 hours (minimum) after which the water level shall be measured to
determine if leakage has occurred. If leaking is noted, the wet well shall be
drained, the leakage repaired, and the test repeated. After satisfactory
completion of the hydrostatic test of the wet well, a drawdown test and start-up
shall be performed. A factory representative shall be on site for this test. Each
pump shall be run through 3 drawdown cycles, measuring drawdown and timing
the run to compute pumping rate. Clean water shall be used for the drawdown
test. The controls shall be checked for operation in the automatic and manual
operation modes. The level control system shall be checked for proper
elevations and operation. The telemetry system and alarms shall be
programmed and checked for proper operation.
D. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E. The factory-authorized technical representative shall prepare and submit three
copies of all necessary test results and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Adjust control set points and other features as necessary for proper
performance.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120-Page 14

3.5 DEMONSTRATION OF ACCEPTABLE PERFORMANCE
A. All equipment associated with this specification shall be subject to a minimum
30 day performance trial period. After start-up, but prior to acceptance by the
Owner, the equipment shall operate within the specified parameters requiring
only routine operations and normal maintenance. If, at any time during this trial
period, the equipment fails to perform as required by this specification, the
Contractor shall be required to make the necessary repairs, modifications or
adjustments to this equipment to allow it to operate as specified. These
modifications shall be accomplished within 30 days of notification by the Owner
to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages
suffered by the Owner, either direct or indirect, resulting from the failure of this
equipment to perform as specified at any time prior to acceptance. After the
necessary equipment adjustments/modifications have been completed, a new
30 day performance trial period shall begin. If, at any time during this second
trial period, the equipment, again, fails to perform as required by this
specification, the Owner may elect to either have the equipment replaced at the
expense of the Contractor or have the cost of this equipment refunded as
indicated in the Schedule of Values established for this project. After
satisfactory performance of the equipment during the indicated performance
trial period, the Owner will issue a written acceptance of the equipment and the
p
warranty period shall be established.
3.6 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of spare parts as detailed
below for each pump supplied on this contract. Spare parts shall be conveyed
to the Owner.
Upper and Lower Mechanical Seal Wear Ring
Motor Cable Cable Entry Washer
Cable Grommet 0-Ring Kit
Inspection Plug Washer Impeller
Upper Bearing Impeller Key
Lower Bearing Impeller Bolt
B. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete canister media refill kit for the
odor control scrubber provided on this contract.
Rev. 11/16/2021 Project#21.00317 223120—Page 15

SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper building wire.
2. Connectors and splices.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control
systems communications cables and Classes 1 , 2, and 3 control cables.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260519—Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying
conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and use.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking
according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and
with ASTM B496 for stranded conductors.
D. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277.
2. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
3. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
E. Shield:
1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized
crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent
coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight-
and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity
rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, all steel I
or malleable iron, electro zinc plated and chromate coated, insulated-throat,
with angled, screw-secured mechanical saddle clip, designed to connect cables
specified in this Section. Provide Thomas & Betts Tite-Bite Connectors or
approved equal
C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this I
Section.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260519—Page 2

1. Material: Tin-plated Copper.
2. Type: Two hole with long barrels.
3. Termination: Compression.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders:
1. Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
B. Branch Circuits:
1. Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and
larger.
C. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE
APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:
1. In office, laboratory, toilet rooms and similar administrative type spaces:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
2. Do not conceal branch circuits in industrial process areas. An exposed
wiring method shall be utilized.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and
Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260519—Page 3

1. When using tray cable, enclose in conduit between cable tray and point of
connection to equipment being served.
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord
with stainless steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit
application.
I. VFC Output Circuits: Type TC-ER cable with braided shield.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points
according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
prior to pulling conductors and cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure
values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave
wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for
9 pp
Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260529
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited
conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with
or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are
terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm
system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes;
cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260519—Page 4

3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor
p p
material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and
insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
li C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of
other end of conductor and identify as spare conductor.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Administrant for Tests and Inspections:
1. Administer and perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has
been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for
compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:
a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical
damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.
b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the
following:
1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
d. Inspect for correct identification.
e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260519—Page 5

f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent
conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and
1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration.
g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.
h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
3. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3
AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are
accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the
scan.
a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies
switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
4. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan
of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:
1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken
to achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 260519
III
'IC
II!
!I'
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260519-Page 6 'I
II

SECTION 260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backboards.
2. Category 6 balanced twisted pair cabling.
3. Balanced twisted pair cabling hardware.
4. Instrumentation cabling.
5. RS-232 cabling.
6. RS-485 cabling.
7. Low-voltage control cabling.
8. Control-circuit conductors.
9. Fire alarm system wires and cables.
10. Identification products.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at
less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Source quality-control reports.
B. Field quality-control reports.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building
Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.
C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and
Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products
according to UL 1685.
D. RoHS compliant.
2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with
requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
B. Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with eggshell white latex paint. 1�
Comply with requirements in Section 099123000 "Interior Painting."
2.3 CATEGORY 6 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet
transmission characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.
B. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for
Category 6 cables.
C. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.
D. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).
E. Cable Rating: Riser. I
F. Jacket: Blue thermoplastic.
I
2.4 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE
A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate balanced 0
twisted pair copper communications cable.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 2
I'

B. General Requirements for Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Hardware:
1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6.
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-
down caps or tools.
3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or
higher.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain balanced twisted pair cable hardware from single
source from single manufacturer.
D. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the
number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare, integral with
connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type
connectors at each jack location for permanent termination of pair groups of
installed cables.
1. Features:
a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels.
b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors.
c. Replaceable connectors.
d. 12, 24 or 48 ports.
2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch equipment racks.
3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair cable indicated.
F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inchlengths; terminated with
an eight-position modular plug at each end.
1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons
to ensure performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect
against snagging.
2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
G. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:
1 . Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector
designed for termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or
shielded balanced twisted pair cable.
2. Comply with IEC 60603-7-1, IEC 60603-7-2, IEC 60603-7-3, IEC 60603-7-
4, and IEC 60603-7.5.
3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.
H. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 3

1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector
designed for termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or
shielded balanced twisted pair cable.
2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.
3. Standards:
a. Category 6, unshielded balanced twisted pair cable shall comply with
IEC 60603-7-4.
4. Marked to indicate transmission performance.
I. Faceplate:
1. Multiple port, to match application requirements or drawing indications,
vertical single-gang faceplates designed to mount to single-gang wall
boxes.
2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complyingwith requirements in
p
Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."
3. For use with snap-in jacks.
J. Legend:
1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.
2.5 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. Description: Indoor/outdoor, single and multi-pair, shielded twisted pair cable.
B. Standard: NFPA 70 Types: Type CMG, Type PLTC; UL 13 and 2250.
C. Rating: 300 V.
D. Conductors: 100-ohm, 16 AWG 7x24 stranded copper. 1
E. Shielding/Screening: Individual pair and overall 100% tinned-copper shielded
twisted pairs (STP).
F. Insulation: XLPE.
G. Cable Rating: Riser. S
H. Jacket: Black PVC, sunlight-resistant.
2.6 RS-232 CABLE
A. PVC-Jacketed, TIA 232-F:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 4
I

1. Nine, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. Polypropylene insulation.
3. Aluminum foil-polyester tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Conductors are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded
(7x32) tinned copper drain wire.
6. NFPA 70 Type: Type CM.
7. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
2.7 RS-485 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper
conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.
2.8 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. Single and Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-
copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.
2.9 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying
with UL 83 in raceway.
B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying
with UL 83 in raceway or power-limited tray cable, in cable tray.
C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper,
Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in raceway or power-limited tray
cable, in cable tray.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 5

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test twisted pair cables according to TIA-568-C.2.
B. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.
1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for
boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section.
1 . Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-
1/2 inches deep.
2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
B. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of
bends between pull points.
C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
D. Raceway Installation at plywood backboards:
1 . Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece
of plywood is installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of the room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these
positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding I
conductor to grounding system.
E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent
sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 6
0

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems."
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.
Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect
and patch panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced and shall be continuous from terminal to
terminal. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points.
5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway.
Install network cabling and control wiring and cable in separate raceway
from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or
different voltages.
6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not
more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames,
and terminals.
7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified
in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install
lacing bars and distribution spools.
8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable.
Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it
with new cable.
9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before
dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating.
10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured
Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.
11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles.
12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and
installed so as to not damage cables.
13. Provide strain relief.
14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals. Do not
bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. Use sleeves or
grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass
around sharp corners and through penetrations.
15. Ground wire shall be copper, and grounding methods shall comply with
IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.
C. Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 7

2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. Do
not untwist balanced twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of
termination to maintain cable geometry.
D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:
1. Install wiring in raceways.
2. Use insulated spade lugs for wire and cable connection to screw
terminals.
3. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and
Boxes for Electrical Systems."
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1 . Open-cable installation shall only be allowed above accessible lay-in
panel type ceilings and at telecommunications backboards. All other
cable shall be installed in raceways, wireways or cabinets.
2. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in
telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and
interconnection equipment.
3. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or raceway a minimum of 8 inches
above ceilings by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart.
4. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with
pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables
between structural members and corrugated panels.
F. Separation from EMI Sources: j
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D recommendations for
separating unshielded copper voice and data communications cable from
potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic
raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall
be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum
of 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A
minimum of 12 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum
of 24 inches.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic I
raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as
follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum
of 2-1/2 inches.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 8
I

b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A
minimum of 6 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum
of 12 inches.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic
raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded
metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No
requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A
minimum of 3 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum
of 6 inches.
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and
Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A
minimum of 5 inches.
3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.
2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.
3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12
AWG.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260529
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited
conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with
or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are
terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm
system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 9

D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes;
cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to an
applicable detail in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
3.7 GROUNDING
A. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in
Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each wire on each end and at each terminal with a number-coded
identification tag. Each wire shall have a unique tag.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections. ,
B. Tests and Inspections: ,
1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification
markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin
assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with
TIA-568-C.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and
bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent
faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in
connection blocks. Test cables after termination, but not after cross-
connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in
TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with
performance requirements in its "Test Instruments (Normative)"
Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in its
"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523—Page 10

and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for
channel or link test configuration.
C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary
report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide or transfer
the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and
submit.
defective if it does not pass tests and
D. End-to-end cabling will be consideredde c
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 260523
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260523-Page 11

it
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
t
I
I

SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless
otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
111 B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: AST
M B3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in
diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
' 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors
terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
IRev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260526-Page 1
I

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches
in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off
insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V
and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit
manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
C. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.
D. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.
E. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with
hex head bolt.
F. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated terminal with set screw.
G. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and
long-stud lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.
H. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. 1
I. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal two-
piece clamp. 0
J. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy.
K. Water Pipe Clamps: I
1 . U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated
for direct burial.
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES 1
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260526—Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded
conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0
AWG minimum. Provide larger sizes where size is specifically indicated.
1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade.
2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when
indicated as part of duct-bank installation.
C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted
connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as
otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be
connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral
and ground buses.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch
circuits.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible
unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or
placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final
grade unless otherwise indicated.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260526—Page 3

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade
and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or
damaging coating if any.
2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections.
3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least
one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance
from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding
electrode conductor. Any details provided on the drawings supercede the
requirements in this paragraph.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care
not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and
Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted
equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-
type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors,
in conduit, from facility's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to
main metal water service to facility. Connect grounding conductors to main
metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type
connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange.
Where a dielectric main water fittings are installed, connect grounding
conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit
or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically
bypass any water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion ofgas pipingsystem downstream from
9 Y
equipment shutoff valve.
4. The requirements of this section also apply to all buildings and facilities
supplied by the facility main electrical service.
E. Ground Rings and Grids: Where specifically indicated on the drawings, install a
grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground
rod and to each indicated item, extending around the perimeter of area or item
indicated.
1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG or sizes
indicated on the drawings, whichever is larger. for ground ring and for taps
to steel structures.
2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from structure's foundation.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260526—Page 4

F. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis
is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and
connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity
and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and
mechanical clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper
jumpers and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to
prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits
have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible,
bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum
ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure
grounding terminal and at any ground test wells. Make tests at ground
rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last
trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means
other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical
treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
lues:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and
Less: 10 ohms.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260526-Page 5

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified
values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce
ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260526—Page 6

SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Conduit and cable support devices.
3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.
4. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including mechanical
expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts,
and hanger rods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with
minimum 13/32-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least
one surface.
1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Stainless steel, Type 316.
3. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.
4. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Stainless steel, steel and malleable-iron
hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of
raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly
consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260529—Page 1

nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have
number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit
individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable
iron.
D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening
g, p
electrical items or their supports to facility surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for
use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and
pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used.
2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are
similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are
suitable for attached structural element.
4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325.
5. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type.
6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation
requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings
or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA 101
B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways:
Space supports for RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists
maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod
size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel
slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least
25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1 . Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit
clamps.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260529—Page 2

E. Provide stainless steel conduit supporting, mounting, anchoring and attachment
components and devices in chemical buildings.
I3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as
specified in this article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, according to
NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static
loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for
strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components:
Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to facility structural
elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and
expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27),
complying with MSS SP-69.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces:
Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures,
pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-
channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-
restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that
avoid the need for reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and
equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260529—Page 3

3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of se dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum
of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials,
reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:
1 . Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up
field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 260529
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260529—Page 4

SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems" for exterior ductbanks, handholes, and underground utility
construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and attachment details.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533 Page 1

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosures, cabinets, and conduit
racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components,
from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on
which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:
1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
3. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
4. FMC: Comply with UL 1 ; aluminum.
5. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
B. Metal Fittings:
1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with
UL 1203 and NFPA 70.
5. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Compression with hexagonal locknuts.
c. Other: Insulated throat.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 2

6. Fittings for FMC: Steel or malleable iron, electro zinc plated and chromate
coated, insulated-throat, with angled, screw-secured mechanical saddle
clip. Provide Thomas & Betts Tite-Bite Connectors or approved equal.
C. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to
lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance
their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit:
1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
B. Nonmetallic Fittings:
1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
2. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type
and material.
a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1,
Type 4X, stainless steel and Type 12 to match requirements for boxes and
enclosures at the location installed, unless otherwise indicated, and sized
according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location
and application.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion
joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and
mate with wireways as required for complete system.
C. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 3

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish, except provide no finish where
stainless steel is utilized.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes,
enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet
locations.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy,
Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire
weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing
more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1 .
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and
UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same
material as recessed box.
I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.
J. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 4X,
stainless steel with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 4

I
I
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried or concrete
encased as indicated on the drawings.
a. Where directional bore is indicated, provide continuous HDPE.
I4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
I 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250
a. Small Junction, Outlet and Device Boxes: Cast Iron.
b. Larger Boxes and Enclosures: Type 4X, stainless steel.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: GRC.
2. Exposed and Subject to Corrosion: RNC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a. Chemical storage, mixing, metering and handling areas.
b. Areas specifically identified on the drawings.
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except
use LFMC in damp or wet locations and in chemical buildings.
5. Boxes and Enclosures:
a. Finished areas: NEMA 250, Type 1
b. Non-finished areas (process, mechanical and electrical): NEMA 250,
Type 4.
1) Small Junction, Outlet and Device Boxes: Cast Iron.
2) Larger Boxes and Enclosures: Type 4X, stainless steel.
c. Areas of High Corrosion: Match raceway materials, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit
fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
E. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg
F.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 5
I

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where
requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102
for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways
allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
C. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
D. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or
hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished
slab.
G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run
except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support
within 12 inches of changes in direction.
H. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall
be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment
specifically designed for material and size involved.
I. General Conduit and Boxes Installation:
necessarily limited to
1. Interior finished spaces includingbut not ecess y offices,
p
control rooms, laboratories, toilets, conference rooms, office storage
rooms and other similar locations:
a. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Interior process, mechanical and electrical spaces:
a. Exposed conduit and boxes, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exterior locations:
a. Conceal all raceway and boxes serving lighting, receptacles, HVAC
equipment and similar devices and equipment at the exterior walls of
buildings.
b. Exposed all other conduit and boxes, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building and construction lines.
Rev. 11/1612021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 6

J. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
K. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to
main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit
close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-
foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building and structure expansion joints at right
angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all
directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved
by Engineer for each specific location.
L. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not
terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor
Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before
making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and
outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings
on service conduits.
O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with
locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures.
Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to
assure a continuous ground path.
Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and
larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the
length.
R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic
line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack
at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare
above grade alongside raceways in use.
S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70
and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install
each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 7

that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to
NFPA 70.
T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so
no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of
environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
2. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and
fittings.
V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where
environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has
straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground
RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change
may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100
feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change
listed for each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F
temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F
temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical
Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041
inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for
PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for
at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of �)
temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or
structure expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston
setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for
conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit
supports to allow for expansion movement.
W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36
inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires,
equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for
transformers and motors.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 8

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are
not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements.
Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of
masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces
to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate
or supported equipment and box.
Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not
in the same vertical channel.
AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning
two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the
purpose.
CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not
support boxes by conduits.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
Prepare trench bottom for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as required.
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work
toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with
expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process.
Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting
strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished
grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction.
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and
equipment and at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this
purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a
minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and
where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or
equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on
terminations at equipment.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 9

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended
by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260533—Page 10

SECTION 260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings, including GRC steel conduit.
2. Rigid nonmetallic duct.
3. Duct accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Direct Buried: Duct or a duct bank that is buried in the ground, without any
additional casing materials such as concrete.
B. Duct: A single duct or multiple ducts. Duct may be either installed singly or as
component of a duct bank.
C. Duct Bank:
1. Two or more ducts installed in parallel, with or without additional casing
materials.
2. Multiple duct banks.
D. GRC: Galvanized rigid (steel) conduit.
E. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course
of events.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service
according to requirements indicated:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260543—Page 1

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's
written permission.
B. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is at grade level unless a lower
water table is noted on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 RIGID NONMETALLIC DUCT
A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, complying with
NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 , with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by
same manufacturer as duct.
B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: Type EB-20 PVC RNC, complying with
NEMA TC 6 & 8, ASTM F512, and UL 651 , with matching fittings complying
with NEMA TC 9 by same manufacturer as duct.
C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.3 DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Spacers: Factory-fabricated, rigid, PVC interlocking spacers; sized for type
and size of duct with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct
spacing indicated while supporting duct during concreting or backfilling.
B. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Comply with requirements for underground-
line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260543—Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of duct, duct bank, handholes, and boxes with
r
final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as
determined in the field. Notify Engineer if there is a conflict between areas of
excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.
B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and
boxes with final locations and profiles of duct and duct banks, as determined by
coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features.
Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to
ensure that duct and duct bank will drain to handholes, and as approved by
Engineer.
C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed and protect vegetation to remain.
Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication.
I3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION
A. Concrete-Encased Duct for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: Type EB-20-
PVC RNC, concrete-encased unless otherwise indicated.
B. Duct for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, direct-
buried where specifically indicated.
C. Duct for Electrical Branch Circuits: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, direct-buried
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bored Underground Duct: Type EPEC-40-HDPE unless otherwise indicated.111
Only provide underground duct where specifically indicated or approved by the
Engineer.
I
E. Underground Ducts Crossing Driveways, Roadways and other locations subject
to routine vehicular traffic.: Type EPC-40 PVC RNC, encased in reinforced
concrete.
IF. Stub-ups: Concrete-encased GRC.
3.3 EARTHWORK
1 1 A. Excavation and Backfill: do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction
equipment.
1 /1 Rev. 1 21 PROJECT#21.00317 260543—Page 3
e 6/20 g
I

B. Restoration: Replace area immediately after backfilling is completed or after
construction vehicle traffic in immediate area is complete.
C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish
original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately
after backfilling is completed.
D. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other
work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming,
seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching.
E. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground duct, duct bank,
and underground structures.
3.4 DUCT AND DUCT-BANK INSTALLATION
A. Where indicated on Drawings, install duct, spacers, and accessories into the
duct-bank configuration shown. Duct installation requirements in this Section
also apply to duct bank.
1. Only install trenchless duct where specifically indicated or directed by the
Engineer. Install trenchless duct by horizontal jacking, boring or
directional boring.
B. Install duct according to NEMA TCB 2.
C. Slope: Pitch duct a minimum slope of 1 :300 down toward handholes and away
from buildings and equipment. Slope duct from a high point between two
handholes, to drain in both directions.
D. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in
direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48
inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise
indicated.
1 . Duct shall have maximum of two 90 degree bends or the total of all bends
shall be no more 180 degrees between pull points.
E. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in duct and fittings and make watertight
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of
adjacent duct do not lie in same plane.
F. Terminator Entrances to Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use
manufactured, cast-in-place duct terminators, with entrances into structure
spaced approximately 6 inches o.c. for 4-inch duct, and vary proportionately for
other duct sizes.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260543—Page 4

1. Begin change from regular spacing to terminator spacing 10 feet from the
terminator, without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in
the line.
2. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: Install an expansion and deflection
fitting in each duct in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to handhole.
Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line duct with
calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch.
G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to GRC at
least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away
from the building and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings
manufactured for RNC-to-GRC transition. Install GRC penetrations of building
walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling."
H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of duct with pulled cables.
Seal spare duct at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand
at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.
I. Pulling Cord: Install 200-lbf-test nylon cord in empty ducts.
J. Direct-Buried Duct and Duct Bank:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct.
2. Width: Excavate trench 3 inches wider than duct on each side.
3. Depth: Install top of duct at least 36 inches below finished grade unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line.
5. Support ducts on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing,
and outdoor temperature.
6. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and
deforming of duct, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet of duct.
1 Place spacers within 24 inches of duct ends. Stagger spacers
approximately 6 inches between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and to
ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Tie entire assembly together
1 using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form
conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
7. Install duct with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and
1 6 inches between power and communications duct.
8. Install manufactured GRC elbows for stub-ups and, at building entrances.
a. Couple RNC duct to GRC with adapters designed for this purpose,
and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
b. Stub-ups to Outdoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC
1 horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install
insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260543-Page 5
I

1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches above finished floor and
minimum 3 inches from conduit side to edge of slab.
c. Stub-ups to Indoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of wall. Install
insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches above finished floor and
no less than 3 inches from conduit side to edge of slab.
9. Concrete encase duct at changes of direction in duct. Extend concrete 3
feet beyond end of elbow in each direction.
10. After installing first tier of duct, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point
and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move
with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this
process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier,
hand place backfill to 4 inches over duct and hand tamp. Firmly tamp
backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand
tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct
connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal
compaction.
a. Place minimum 3 inches of sand as a bed for duct. Place sand to a
minimum of 6 inches above top level of duct.
b. Place minimum 6 inches of engineered fill above concrete
encasement of duct.
K. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Bury conducting underground line specified
in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" no less than 12 inches
above all concrete-encased duct and duct banks and approximately 12 inches
below grade. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct
bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-
bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart,
horizontally.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1 . Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion
of installation of underground duct, duct bank, and utility structures.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260543-Page 6

2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint
integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a
minimum 12-inch-long mandrel equal to duct size minus 1/4 inch. If
obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full
length of duct until duct cleaner indicates that duct is clear of dirt and debris.
Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading
lubricant throughout ducts.
END OF SECTION 260543
I
Rev. 11116/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260543-Page 7
1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Labels.
2. Bands and tubes.
3. Tapes and stencils.
4. Tags.
5. Signs.
6. Cable ties.
7. Miscellaneous identification products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1 Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553-Page 1

1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use
colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit
conductors.
1. General: At existing facilities, provide color scheme that matches existing
field installed colors for each voltage and phase. Where multiple colors
existing for the same voltage and phase, contact the Engineer for
guidance.
2. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than
No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit.
3. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
4. Colors for 240-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
5. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
c. Phase C: Yellow.
6. Color for Neutral:
a. White: 208 and 240 V systems.
b. Gray: 480 V systems.
7. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.
C. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."
D. Warning Label Colors:
1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
E. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following
legends:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553-Page 2

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK
HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning:
a. 208 and 240 V Systems: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA
IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR
FOR 36 INCHES."
b. 480 V Systems: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR
FOR 42 INCHES."
F. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Black letters on a white field.
2.3 LABELS
A. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic
sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by
gripping action.
2.4 BANDS AND TUBES
A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored
acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that
stay in place by gripping action.
B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-
printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full
shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.
2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS
Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit
A. Marker Tapes: y p yp ,
p Y
identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not
less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.
C. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow
and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
D. Underground-Line Warning Tape:
1. Tape:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553-Page 3

1
a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and
suitable to identify and locate underground electrical, control, '
instrumentation and communications utility lines.
b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by
burial operations.
c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to
degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive
substances commonly found in soils.
2. Color and Printing:
a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4,
and ANSI Z535.5.
b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH
VOLTAGE".
c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE,
CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER
CABLE".
3. Tape Type I:
a. Multilayer laminate, consisting of high-density polyethylene scrim
coated with pigmented polyolefin; bright colored, continuous-printed
on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-
burial service.
b. Width: 3 inches.
c. Thickness: 12 mils.
d. Weight: 36.1 Ib/1000 sq. ft..
e. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 400 lbf and 11,500 psi.
4. Tape Type II:
a. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed
pigmented woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear
protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the
conductive core; bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with
the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
b. Width: 3 inches.
c. Overall Thickness: 8 mils.
d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.
e. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft..
f. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 300 Ibf and 12,500 psi.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553—Page 4

2.6 TAGS
A. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.023 inch thick, color-coded
for phase and voltage level, with factory screened permanent designations;
punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
B. Write-on Tags:
1. Polyester Tags: 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and
cable tie for attachment.
2. Marker for Tags:
a. Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.7 SIGNS
A. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:
1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs,
with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for
fasteners, and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.
B. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
1. Engraved legend.
2. Thickness:
a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick.
b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick.
' c. Engraved legend with white letters on a dark gray background.
d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets
in corners for mounting.
2.8 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-
locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553-Page 5

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to
exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. '
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material
and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and
flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification
products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using
materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other
features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications,
Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and
maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and operation and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish
work.
F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation,
and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553—Page 6

G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall
completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings
in contact, side by side.
1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.
H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables over 600 V: Identification shall
completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent identification of two-color
markings in contact, side by side.
1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.
I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed
alarm, control, and signal connections.
J. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white
legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency
instructions at equipment used for power transfer.
K. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those
Iappropriate for viewing from the floor.
L. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and
accessibility.
M. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with
Ihigh visibility and accessibility.
N. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high
Ivisibility and accessibility.
O. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and
Iaccessibility.
P. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility
and accessibility.
' 1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns
for a minimum distance of 6 inches where splices or taps are made. Apply
Ilast two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.
Q. Underground Line Warning Tape:
' 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning
tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished
I grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a
common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
1 Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553—Page 7
I

I
a. Provide Type I (non-conductive type) for all conductive cables.
b. Provide Type II (conductive type) for all non-conductive cables.
R. Metal Tags:
1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.
2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties.
S. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags:
1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.
2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties.
T. Write-on Tags:
1 . Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.
2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties.
U. Baked-Enamel Signs:
1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high
letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are
required, use signs minimum 2 inches high.
V. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:
1 . Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
Yp
appropriate to the location and substrate.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high
letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use
labels 2 inches high.
W. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high
letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use
labels 2 inches high.
X. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below:
1 . Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553—Page 8

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.
B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and
circuit designation.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service,
Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify
with self-adhesive raceway labels.
1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and
floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot
maximum intervals in congested areas.
D. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the
covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with labels
containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall
be as follows:
1. "POWER."
2. "CONTROL/INSTRUMENTATION."
3. "COMMUNICATIONS."
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults,
pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use snap-around labels to
identify the phase.
1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and
floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot
maximum intervals in congested areas.
F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor
or cable designation, origin, and destination.
G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at
terminations, provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor
designation.
H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to
conductors and list source.
r
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553-Page 9

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Marker tape that is
uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed
connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
J. Horizontal Copper Data Cables: Label each cable with a heat-shrink, preprinted
tube indicating the following, in the order listed:
1. Room number.
2. Colon.
3. Faceplate number.
K. Faceplates: Label individual faceplates with self-adhesive labels. Place label at
top of faceplate. Each faceplate shall be labeled with its individual, sequential
designation, numbered clockwise when entering room from primary egress,
composed of the following, in the order listed:
1. Wiring closet designation.
2. Colon.
3. Faceplate number.
L. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.
M. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape to finished surfaces. Show
working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall
comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not
install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
N. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded
and ungrounded conductors.
O. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and
Lighting: Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.
1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or
cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power-transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
P. Operating Instruction Signs: Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.
Q. Equipment Identification Labels:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553—Page 10

1. Indoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign.
2. Outdoor Equipment: 302 Stainless steel..
3. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided
by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the
form of a engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label for interior
locations and 302 stainless steel for exterior locations.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on
Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment
supplied by the secondary.
e. Enclosed switches.
f. Enclosed circuit breakers.
g. Enclosed controllers.
h. Variable-speed controllers.
i. Push-button stations.
j. Power-transfer equipment.
k. Contactors.
I. Remote-controlled switches and control devices.
m. Power-generating units.
n. Monitoring and control equipment.
o. Process control equipment.
p. SCADA system equipment.
END OF SECTION 260553
111
1
1
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 260553-Page 11
I

SECTION 262213 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
' Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and
secondary rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.
1
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note any shipping damage to packaging
and transformer.
1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will
be stored after inspection, re-package transformer using original or new
packaging materials that provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's
packaging.
B. Storage: Store in a warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original
shipping packaging.
C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written
instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods
during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a
space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting
transformers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262213-Page 1

1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1 . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels.
2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.
D. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color-code bolts, wedges, blocks, and
other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing.
Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer
enclosure.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low
hysteresis losses.
1. One leg per phase.
2. Core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10 percent
above the nominal tap voltage.
3. Grounded to enclosure.
C. Coils: Continuous except windings for
g p o taps.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262213—Page 2

I
I
1. Coil Material: Aluminum.
I 2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
3. Terminal Connections: Welded.
I D. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils
completely resin encapsulated.
IE. Enclosure (Indoor Applications): Ventilated.
1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin
I compound using a vacuum-pressure impregnation process to seal out
moisture and air.
2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on
I auxiliary fans.
3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.
4. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
a. Finish Color: Gray weather-resistant enamel.
F. Enclosure (Outdoor Applications): Ventilated.
I1. NEMA 250, Type 3R: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin
compound, sealing out moisture and air.
I 2. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.
3. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
Ia. Finish Color: Gray weather-resistant enamel.
G. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: None.
IH. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5
percent tap below normal full capacity.
1 I. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two
2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.
I J. Insulation Class, Smaller Than 30 kVA: 180 deg C, UL-component-recognized
insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient
temperature.
IK. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized
insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient
Itemperature.
L. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the
III transformer enclosure.
1 Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262213-Page 3
I

M. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-
width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling
between input and output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
N. Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor-rated transformers.
O. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets or, when required by seismic
loading, wall brackets fabricated from design drawings signed and sealed by a
licensed structural engineer.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-acrylic, melamine plastic or stainless steel
signs for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant
screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and
IEEE C57.12.91.
1. Resistance measurements of all windings at rated voltage connections
and at all tap connections.
2. Ratio tests at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.
3. Phase relation and polarity tests at rated voltage connections.
4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at rated voltage
connections.
5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at rated
voltage connections.
6. Applied and induced tensile tests.
7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.
8. Insulation-Resistance Tests:
a. High-voltage to ground.
b. Low-voltage to ground.
c. High-voltage to low-voltage.
9. Temperature tests.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262213—Page 4

I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature
requirements for each transformer.
IB. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances
required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
IC. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting
conditions where transformers will be installed.
I D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Environment:
Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located.
I Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
I3.2 INSTALLATION
I A. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-
dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to
adjacent wall surface.
IB. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 and anchor floor-
mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic
codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and
111 Supports for Electrical Systems."
1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer
I provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
I C. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
ID. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended
torques to reduce noise generation.
E. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
IA. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
IRev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262213-Page 5
I

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and
supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Small (Up to 167-kVA Single-Phase or 500-kVA Three-Phase) Dry-Type
Transformer Field Tests:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets
have been removed.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by
manufacturer.
f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as
specified.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each
winding-to-ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data,
comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate polarization index:
the value of the index shall not be less than 1 .0.
c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not
deviate by more than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils
or the calculated ratio. If test fails, replace the transformer.
d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-
neutral, after energization and prior to loading.
B. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as
specified above.
C. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated
and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262213—Page 6

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of
typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage
I conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding
nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage
minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings
Ias test results.
B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and
Itap settings.
I
I3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
1 END OF SECTION 262213
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
1 Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262213—Page 7
I

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
IA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
I 1.2 SUMMARY
I
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit
circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
E. SPD: Surge protective device.
F. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs,
accessories, and components indicated.
2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
r1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416-Page 1
1

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor
termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings.
3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental
protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets,
hinges, and locks.
4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective
devices.
6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.
7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
9. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
10. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Include selectable
ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an Internet
link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
TE 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1 . Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416—Page 2

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 certified.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install
temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and
111 maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions
11 unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104
I deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
' 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
I conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service
according to requirements indicated:
I 1 . Notify Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer's or
Owner's written permission.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
I
IRev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416-Page 3

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial
Completion.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. SPD Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum
dimensions.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. Provide ratings
for panelboards as indicated below, unless noted otherwise.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel..
c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping
Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2. Height: 84 inches maximum.
3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted
fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims
shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416—Page 4

4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard
enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel
sections.
5. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately
after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat,
baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
F. Incoming Mains:
1. Location: As required for application, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
a. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.
2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and
protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the
main bus connectors.
3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment
grounding conductors; bonded to box.
4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service
entrance applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not
mount neutral bus in gutter.
H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without
derating.
3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter
space, if required, for larger conductors.
4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type, with a lug on the neutral bar
for each pole in the panelboard.
5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type, with a
lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.
I. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one
or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
J. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,
filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of
devices.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416-Page 5

1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: 25 percent.
K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical
short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100
percent interrupting capacity.
1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall
have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than
10,000 A rms symmetrical.
2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and
less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but
not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.
2.2 POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1 . ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1 , distribution type.
D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
E. Mains: Circuit breaker or Main Lugs only, as indicated.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A
and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger
Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416—Page 6

1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1 , lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Main Lugs only, as indicated.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable
without disturbing adjacent units.
F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed
alike.
II
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
lA. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.
I b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A
and larger.
2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with
Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
3. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
4. MCCB Features and Accessories:
II a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.
c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load
I ratings.
d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor materials.
Ie. Application Listing: Appropriate for application.
IRev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416-Page 7

f. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with
adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and
ground-fault indicator.
g. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip
at 75 percent of rated voltage.
h. Electronic Trip Unit: Three-pole breakers with ampere ratings greater
than 150 amperes shall have electronic (LSIG) adjustable trip units
with zone protective interlocking connections.
i. Auxiliary Contacts: One, SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a"
contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in
reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
j. Multi pole units enclosed in a single housingwith a single handle or
p 9 g
factory assembled to operate as a single unit.
k. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-
breaker handle in on or off position.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage,
number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the
panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification
standards, and AIC rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal
frame with transparent protective cover.
1 . Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to
distinguish it from all other circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards
to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum
required clearances specified in NFPA 70.
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged,
rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416—Page 8

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical
and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace
clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Equipment Mounting:
1. For panelboards with ratings greater than 800 A, install on cast-in-place
concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment
bases and foundations specified in Section 033000.
2. For both floor and wall mounted panelboards, attach to the vertical
finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
IE. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and
brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
1 F. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
G. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
1 H. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth.
Orient steel slotted supports vertically.
I I I. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory
installed.
1 . Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
1 2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using
I calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written
instructions.
J. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately
derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes,
IRev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416—Page 9
1

separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground
bars.
K. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
L. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space
or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.
M. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final
room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories
are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-
voltage air circuit breakers and low-voltage surge arrestors stated in
NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers and Paragraph 7.19.1 Surge
Arrestors, Low-Voltage. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416—Page 10

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to
maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
IEND OF SECTION 262416
1
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262416—Page 11

SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.
2. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.
3. Cord and plug sets.
4. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A.
5. Wall plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
D. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
E. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. RoHS compliant.
` Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262726—Page 1

D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be
substituted under the following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding
building wire.
2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section.
F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:
1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.
2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
G. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Grayunless
Y
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
H. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate
from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.
B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A:
1 . Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters
that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
3. Standards: Comply with UL 498.
4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in
Damp or Wet Locations" Article.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED
indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
3. Type: Feed through.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262726—Page 2

4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket;
with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent
of the equipment rating.
C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle
type for connection.
2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A
A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
B. Two-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
C. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
D. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.
B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch-thick, satin-finished, Type 302
stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover,
and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
5. Material for Chemical Storage, Handling and Metering Locations: Gray
PVC with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262726-Page 3

damp locations. Where used for specified metering pumps, provide an in-
service Type 3R cover.
C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R,
weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers
that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,
concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the
raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not
cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is
complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or
terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from
stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with
3. g py
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign
matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is
large enough.
D. Device Installation:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262726—Page 4

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and
that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is
time to connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge
covers, until the last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6
inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals.
Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the
way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by
manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A
circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers
used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal
contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on
horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes
and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not
cover rough wall opening.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long
dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group
adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream
receptacles is not required.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
i I
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
OJEC # 003 Page 5
PR T 21. 17 262726—
Rev. 11/1612021

B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or
illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
C. Tests for Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is
unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely
mounted.
6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance
at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path,
defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove
malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified
above.
D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
END OF SECTION 262726
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262726—Page 6

SECTION 262813 FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:
a. Control circuits.
b. Enclosed controllers.
c. Enclosed switches.
2. Spare-fuse cabinets.
1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40
deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature
adjustment factors to fuse ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1 . Eaton (Bussmann & Edison).
2. Littelfuse, Inc.
3. Mersen USA.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit,
from single source from single manufacturer.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262813—Page 1

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1 , current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with
voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.
1. Type RK-5: 250 or 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.
2. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting.
3. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of
maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.
2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET
A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged
door and key-coded cam lock and pull.
1 . Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare
capacity minimum.
2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch-high letters on exterior of
door.
4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from
fuse manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install
fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262813—Page 2

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors
must be applied to fuse ratings.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Cartridge Fuses:
1 . Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
2. Other Branch Circuits: Class J, fast acting.
3. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer
duty.
4. Provide open-fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable
without removing fuse.
B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated
in the field by Engineer.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse
replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to
each fuse block, socket, and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262813—Page 3

1
i
1
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262813—Page 4

1
1
SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
4. Enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations,
sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and
rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each
type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 1

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS i
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed
switches and circuit breakers.
b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and
rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for
each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic
format.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but
no fewer than three of each size and type.
2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding
104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816-Page 2

I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent
protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product
category, from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances
between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty:
1. Single or Double throw, as indicated.
2. Three pole.
3. 240 or 600-V ac, as indicated or required for the application.
4. 1200 A and smaller.
5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate indicated fuses.
6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked
with cover in closed position.
D. Accessories:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 3

II
II
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and
aluminum ground conductors. II
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R II
fuses are specified.
4. Auxiliary Contact Kit, where indiated: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary
contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating II
- 120-V ac.
5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor
material. II
6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment, where
indicated or required for the application.
II
2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by II
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division). I)
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac (as
indicated), 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
D. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and
aluminum ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R
fuses are specified.
4. Auxiliary Contact Kit, where indicated: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary
contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating
- 120-V ac.
5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor
material.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 4

,
2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material.
Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and
the accessory mounting area.
D. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping
of all poles, which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-
breaker handle shall be over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position
between on and off to provide local trip indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon
shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to providing international I/O
markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of
the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping
mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.
E. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with
applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be
clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent
rated.
F. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.
G. Lugs shall be suitable for 167 deg F rated wire.
H. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with
available fault currents.
I. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for
low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
J. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide electronic trip unit for circuit-breakers
for sizes larger than 150 A or, for lower ratings, where specifically indicated on
the drawings. Trip units shall be equipped with zone protective interlocking
connections. Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-
adjustable settings:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 5

1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I-squared t response.
K. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole
configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
L. Ground-Fault Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B
ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
M. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor material.
2.5 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1 , NEMA 250, and
UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint,
electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1); gray
baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized galvannealed
steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R, 12); a brush finish on Type 304 stainless steel
(NEMA 250 Type 4-4X stainless steel); or copper-free cast aluminum alloy
(NEMA 250 Types 7, 9).
C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no
knockouts. NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with
threaded conduit openings in both endwalls.
D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally
operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not
the cover. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated
override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism,
which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool
used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter
the enclosure in order to override the interlock.
E. Enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X stainless steel, 12, or 12K
shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of
the enclosure cover when the circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the
circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is open.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816-Page 6

- F. NEMA 250 Type 7/9 enclosures shall be furnished with a breather and drain kit
to allow their use in outdoor and wet location applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit
breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas
and conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
�I conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service
according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
11 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer's or
Owner's written permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
II
3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS
IIA. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed
locations with the following environmental ratings.
1. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel..
3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
i` 4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless
steel.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Ii
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816-Page 7

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components
with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and
brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and
components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections for Switches: 0
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. II
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
c. Verify that the unit is clean.
d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and
me
chanical operation.
e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and
Drawings.
f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact
integrity.
g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of 111
the two following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. I
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 8
I

1
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of
similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from
those of similar bolted connections by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with
' manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with
•
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS
Table 100.12.
h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as
described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
i. Verify correct phase barrier installation.
j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and
sliding surfaces.
11 2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a
low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance
values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that
deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder.
Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's
published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available,
investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar
switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across
each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use
Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation
resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as
recommended in manufacturer's published data.
d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that
deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.
e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault
Protection Systems, Low-Voltage."
B. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 9

II
II
a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the
Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of
the two following methods: I
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of
similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from
those of similar bolted connections by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with
manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS
Table 100.12. 1
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed
units.
h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings as indicated.
2. Electrical Tests: 111
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a
low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance
values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that
deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with circuit breaker closed, and
across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's
published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate
values of insulation resistance less than those published in
Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.
c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values shall not exceed
the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's
published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from I
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 10
II

adjacentpoles or similar switches bymore than 50 percent of the
lowest value.
d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect
to ground. Applied potential shall be 500-V do for 300-V rated cable
{ and 1000-V do for 600-V rated cable. Test duration shall be one
minute. For units with solid state components, follow manufacturer's
recommendation. Insulation resistance values shall be no less than
two megohms.
e. Determine the following by primary current injection:
1) Long-time pickup and delay. Pickup values shall be as
specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's
published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including
adjustment factors.
2) Short-time pickup and delay. Short-time pickup values shall be
as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed
manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance
band, including adjustment factors.
3) Ground-fault pickup and time delay. Ground-fault pickup values
shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed
manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance
band, including adjustment factors.
4) Instantaneous pickup. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as
specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances.
p
f. Test functionality of the trip unit by means of primary current
injection. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be as specified
and within manufacturer's published tolerances.
g. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils
in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup
voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall be as indicated by
manufacturer.
h. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features such as trip and pickup
indicators; zone interlocking; electrical close and trip operation; trip-
free, anti-pump function; and trip unit battery condition. Reset all trip
logs and indicators. Investigate units that do not function as
designed.
i. Verify operation of charging mechanism. Investigate units that do not
function as designed.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more
than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816-Page 11

a
a
each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 111
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after
date of Substantial Completion. 0
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device
designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations
from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. I
5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace 1�
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
111
C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do
not pass tests and inspections.
111
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges to values as indicated.
END OF SECTION 262816 11
a
11
e
a
II
0
0
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262816—Page 12
11

SECTION 262923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFCs, rated
600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction
motors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).
B. CPT: Control power transformer.
C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
D. LED: Light-emitting diode.
E. NC: Normally closed.
F. NO: Normally open.
G. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
H. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
I. RTU: Remote Terminal Unit.
J. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.
K. VFC or VFD: Variable-frequency motor controller or drive. The terms VFC and
VFD are used synonymously throughout the Contract Documents.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated.
1. Include dimensions and finishes for VFCs.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923-Page 1
e

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated.
1. Include mounting and attachment details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights,
loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include project
specific diagrams that distinguish all factory and field wiring. Include
terminal block and wiring designations.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and
reprogramming microprocessor control modules.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers,
controls, and status and alarm points.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each
size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent
surfaces and other items.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 2

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Eaton.
2. Rockwell Automation, Inc.
3. Schneider Electric USA, Inc.
4. Other manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered provided a
request is made not later than 14 calendar days prior to the receipt of bids.
Other manufacturers that are allowed to provide products must be added
by addendum prior to the receipt of bids.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements for VFCs:
1. VFCs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.
B. Application: Variable torque, centrifugal water pump or submersible sewage
pump.
C. VFC Description: Variable-frequency motor controller, consisting of power
converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested
in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and
overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit;
arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of
one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and
frequency.
1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B
motors, as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application
Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with
Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-
Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."
2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by
NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed
Polyphase Motors."
3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating
9 by
an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923-Page 3

D. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and
type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a
power-transmission connection.
E. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency
throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.
F. Unit Operating Requirements:
1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of VFC input
voltage rating.
2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent.
3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency
rating.
4. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any
load or speed condition.
6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 22 kA.
7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding
104 deg F.
8. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).
9. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2.
11. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds;
minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds.
12. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz.
13. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
14. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 2 to 10 kHz.
15. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and do injection
braking.
G. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, isolated from all power circuits.
H. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a
minimum 40:1 speed range.
1. Signal: Electrical.
I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.
J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 4

1. Surge Suppression: Factoryinstalled as an integral part of the VFC,
pp g
complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2.
2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including
speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or
stop; with alarm.
3. Under- and overvoltage trips.
4. Inverter overcurrent trips.
5. VFC and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-
based thermal protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal
characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor-
overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad.
6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands.
7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
8. Loss-of-phase protection.
9. Reverse-phase protection.
10. Short-circuit protection.
11. Motor-overtemperature fault.
K. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of
power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault
correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.
1. User selectable as ON or OFF.
L. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a
power interruption until motor has stopped.
p
M. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back
based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-
ventilated motors at slow speeds.
N. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA KS 1, nonfusible
switch, with power fuse block and current-limiting fuses with pad-lockable, door-
mounted handle mechanism.
1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating.
2. Auxiliary Contacts: NO or NC, arranged to activate before switch blades
open.
2.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATION
A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:
1. Power on.
2. Running.
3. Remote on.
4. Motor Overtemp.
5. High Discharge Pressure.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 5

6. VFC fault.
B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible,
sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete
programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic
capability.
1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include
keys for HAND, OFF, and REMOTE modes.
2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through
identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only;
view and operate; and view, operate, and service.
a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual
control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control
through a remote source.
C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:
1 . Real-time clock with current time and date.
2. Running log of total power versus time.
3. Total run time.
4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.
D. Indicating Devices: Digital display and additional readout devices as required,
mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including,
but not limited to:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
2. Motor speed (rpm).
3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
4. Motor current (amperes).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Fault or alarming status (code).
7. PID feedback signal (percent).
8. DC-link voltage (V dc).
9. Set point frequency (Hz).
10. Motor output voltage (V ac).
11. Mechanical non-resettable elapsed time meter.
E. Control Signal Interfaces:
1. Electric Input Signal Interface:
a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: User configurable
as 0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc.
b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 6

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-
setting input signals from the SCADA system or other control
device/system:
a. 0- to 10-V dc.
b. 4- to 20-mA dc.
c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable and user
configurable analog output signal(s) (0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc),
which can be configured for any of the following:
a. Output frequency (Hz).
b. Output current (load).
c. DC-link voltage (V dc).
d. Motor torque (percent).
e. Motor speed (rpm).
f. Set point frequency (Hz).
4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of three programmable dry-circuit
relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
a. Motor running.
b. Set point speed reached.
c. VFC fault.
5. Provide labelled terminal blocks in a single location within VFC for all field
wiring connections.
2.4 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING
A. Input Line Conditioning: Provide 5% line reactors for each VFC for input line
conditioning.
2.5 ENCLOSURES
A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at
installed location.
1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 12, or as indicated.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5;
factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923-Page 7
1

1. Push Buttons: Shielded.
2. Pilot Lights: Push to test.
3. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
B. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.
C. Supplemental Meters:
1. Non-resettable elapsed-time meter.
D. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release
condensation in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosures installed outdoors or in
unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
E. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in
NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior
spaces subject to humidityand temperature swings.
p 9
F. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 12; UL 508 component
recognized: Supply fan, with stainless-steel intake and exhaust grills and filters;
120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-
2.
1. Test each VFC while connected to a motor that is comparable to that for
which the VFC is rated.
2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of
functions and features specified.
B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged,
or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit
connections before VFC installation.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 8

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with
motor-driven equipment.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
IA. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and the SCADA RTU's.
Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power
ICables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where
applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-
control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in
manual-control position.
2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and
automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-
pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload
protectors.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate.
3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 9

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment
installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting
motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
3. Test continuity of each circuit.
4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor
nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify
Engineer before starting the motor(s).
5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for
Adjustable Speed Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing
Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections,
and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more
than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of
each VFC. Remove front panels so joints and connections are
accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each VFC 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device
designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations
from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies
the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 10

1 . Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Perform tests concurrently with SCADA system tests to confirm proper
control and monitoring of the system via SCADA.
3. Perform tests using both normal and standby power systems.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status
indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory
after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.
B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and
overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.
C. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids
prior to Substantial Completion.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.
END OF SECTION 262923
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 262923—Page 11

SECTION 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Contactor-type automatic transfer switches.
2. Transfer switch accessories.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for transfer switches.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical
characteristics, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details showing minimum clearances,
conductor entry provisions, gutter space, and installed features and
devices.
2. Include material lists for each switch specified.
3. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch,
bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking
provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
4. Riser Diagram: Show interconnection wiring between transfer switches,
bypass/isolation switches, annunciators, and control panels.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600-Page 1

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
b. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and
calibration instructions, including software, where applicable.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
of transfer switch or transfer switch components that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 110.
D. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
E. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Short-Circuit Ratings: Adequate for duty
imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault
conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.
1. Short-time withstand capability for three cycles.
F. Repetitive Accuracy of Solid-State Controls: All settings shall be plus or minus 2
percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70
deg C.
G. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or
exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according
to IEEE C62.62. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand
test of NEMA ICS 1.
H. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized
solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism. Switches for emergency or
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600—Page 2

standby purposes shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked in both
directions to prevent simultaneous connection to both power sources unless
closed transition.
I. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated unless otherwise indicated.
J. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and
other units indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within
enclosure to control heater.
K. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at
transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices,
annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication
capability matched with remote device.
L. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop
Drawings, by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable shrinkable
sleeve markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable markers are
specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field
wiring indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top,
side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal
strips.
4. Accessible via front access.
M. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, type as indicated on drawings,
complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 CONTACTOR-TYPE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Caterpillar, Inc.; Electric Power Division.
2. Cummins Power Generation.
3. Eaton.
4. Kohler Power Systems.
5. MTU America Inc.
6. Russelectric, Inc.
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600—Page 3

C. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
D. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-
rated current between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or
insulated-case circuit-breaker components are unacceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching.
Contactor-style automatic transfer-switch units, rated 600 A and higher,
shall have separate arcing contacts.
4. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
5. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
6. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
7. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.
8. Connectors shall be marked for conductor size and type according to
UL 1008.
E. Automatic Delayed-Transition Transfer Switches: Pauses or stops in
intermediate position to momentarily disconnect both sources, with transition
controlled by programming in the automatic transfer-switch controller.
Interlocked to prevent the load from being closed on both sources at the same
time.
1. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to
delay transfer and engine start signals for alternative source. Adjustable
from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.
2. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent
closing both sources on the load at the same time.
3. Fully automatic break-before-make operation with transfer when two
sources have near zero phase difference.
F. Electric Nonautomatic Switch Operation: Electrically actuated by push buttons
designated "Normal Source" and "Alternative Source." Switch shall be capable
of transferring load in either direction with either or both sources energized.
G. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry
contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval shall be
adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
H. Digital Communication Interface: Ethernetport to communicate with plant
9
SCADA system.
I. Automatic Transfer-Switch Controller Features:
1. Controller operates through a period of loss of control power.
2. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal and Alternate Source:
Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600—Page 4

I
be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage shall
be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup
at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to
generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be
adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95
I percent.
4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from zero to 30
minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes. Override shall automatically
I defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency
source, provided normal supply has been restored.
5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
I
6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch
normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.
Ia. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved
"Normal Source Available."
I b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved
"Emergency Source Available."
I 8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-
throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so
I transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source
regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override
status.
I 10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one
isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V do minimum.
11. Engine Shutdown Contacts:
a. Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for
five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-
generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.
I12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts
engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset
I time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down
period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30
days. Running periods shall be adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory
I settings shall be for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and
5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise
with and without load transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
IRev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600—Page 5
I
i

II
c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power
is unavailable.
J. Large-Motor-Load Power Transfer:
1. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so
contacts close only when the two sources are synchronized in phase and
frequency. Relay shall compare phase relationship and frequency
difference between normal and emergency sources and initiate transfer
when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer
can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer shall be initiated
only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent
or more of nominal voltage.
2. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator with programmed
neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working
switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint
during transfer. Adjustable pause from 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum, and
factory set for 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs
for both transfer directions. Disable pause unless both sources are live.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect components, assembled switches, and
associated equipment according to UL 1008. Ensure proper operation. Check
transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance
with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with
NEMA ICS 1.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
1. For each of the tests required by UL 1008, performed on representative
devices, for emergency systems. Include results of test for the following
conditions:
a. Overvoltage.
b. Undervoltage.
c. Loss of supply voltage.
d. Reduction of supply voltage.
e. Alternative supply voltage or frequency is at minimum acceptable
values.
f. Temperature rise.
g. Dielectric voltage-withstand; before and after short-circuit test.
h. Overload.
i. Contact opening.
j. Endurance.
k. Short circuit.
I. Short-time current capability.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600—Page 6

m. Receptacle withstand capability.
n. Insulating base and supports damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1 A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
' 1. Install transfer switches on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).
Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified
in Section 033000.
2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into bases.
3. Provide workspace and clearances required by NFPA 70.
' B. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
D. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
1 A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and
conductors to generator sets, control, and communication requirements of
transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at
no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
' B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways except within electrical enclosures.
1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points
with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending
radii.
D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for
' Electrical Systems."
E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600-Page 7

F. Connect twisted pair cable according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage
Electrical Power Cables."
G. Route and brace conductors according to manufacturer's written
instructions and Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Do not obscure manufacturer's markings and labels.
H. Final connections to equipment shall be made with liquidtight, flexible metallic
conduit no more than 18 inches in length.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Administrant for Tests and Inspections:
1 . Engage factory-authorized service representative to administer and
perform tests and inspections on components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing equipment, test for compliance with requirements according
to NETA ATS.
2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and
Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances.
d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and
on moving and sliding surfaces.
f. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible.
g. Verify tightness of all control connections.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of
the following methods, or both:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's
published data.
i. Perform manual transfer operation.
j. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate
sources.
k. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters.
I. Inspect control power transformers.
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600—Page 8

I
1
1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads,
I tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general
condition.
2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit-breaker ratings
I match Drawings.
3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting contacts,
grounding contacts, and interlocks.
1 3. Electrical Tests:
I
a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect
to ground.
b. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. Compare measured values
I
with manufacturer's acceptable values.
c. Verify settings and operation of control devices.
d. Calibrate and set all relays and timers.
I e. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation.
f. Perform automatic transfer tests.
g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions:
I1) Normal source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays.
2) Engine start sequence.
3) Time delay on transfer.
I
4) Alternative source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing
relays.
5) Automatic transfer operation.
6) Interlocks and limit switch function.
7) Time delay and retransfer on normal power restoration.
8) Engine cool-down and shutdown feature.
I4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with
insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control
I
circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer.
Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
I
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and
integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
Ic. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
I 5. After energizing circuits, perform each electrical test for transfer switches
stated in NETA ATS and demonstrate interlocking sequence and
operational function for each switch at least three times.
I
1 Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600-Page 9
I

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer
switches and retransfer from emergency source with normal source
available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal
source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of
control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic
transfer-switch operations.
f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct
values exceeding 500 microhms and values for one pole deviating by
more than 50 percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine
starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of
normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.
C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays.
Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory
completion of tests.
E. Transfer switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and
related equipment.
B. Training shall include testing ground-fault protective devices and instructions to
determine when the ground-fault system shall be retested. Include instructions
on where ground-fault sensors are located and how to avoid negating the
ground-fault protection scheme during testing and circuit modifications.
C. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION 263600
Rev. 11/16/2021 PROJECT#21.00317 263600—Page 10

I
I SECTION 312230 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
IPART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
Ithis Section.
I1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this section consists of the construction of a base
I composed of an approved aggregate material hauled to the site, placed on the
site, compacted, and shaped to conform to the lines, grades, depths, and
typical sections shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.
I
PERFORMANCE
1.3REQUIREMENTS
I A. The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor,
equipment, incidentals, and services required for the complete installation of
aggregate base course materials in the locations shown on the drawings and as
Ispecified herein.
B. All work in connection with installing aggregate base course materials shall
I comply with all current requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The
Contractor is responsible for being familiar with and adhering to these
requirements.
IC. The Contractor shall inspect the locations of the proposed work associated with
this Section and shall familiarize themselves with the conditions under which
I the work will be performed, and with all necessary details and the suitability of
their equipment and methods for the work required. The omission of any
installation details which may not appear within the Contract Documents shall
I not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for completing the work as
necessary.
I D. Construction shall be done in such a manner that will not interfere with the
operation of any street, highway, railway, or other facility nor weaken or
damage any embankment or structure. Barricades and lights shall be furnished
I and maintained to safeguard traffic and pedestrians as required by authorities
having jurisdiction until such time as the operation has been completed.
I
June 2021 Project#21.00317 312230—Page 1

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and certificates: For all aggregate base course materials.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall utilize methods of handling, hauling, and placing which will
minimize segregation and contamination of the aggregate used for the base
course. If segregation occurs, the Engineer may require that changes be made
in the Contractor's methods and may also require remixing of the aggregate to
achieve the proper mixture. No additional compensation will be made for
remixing, additional equipment, or other measures necessary to provide the
coarse aggregate base course specified. Aggregate which becomes
contaminated with foreign materials to the extent that the base course will not
serve its intended use shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no
additional expense to the Owner. The above requirements will be applicable
regardless of the type of aggregate placed and regardless of prior acceptance.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. For all work within the Department of Transportation right-of-way, the
Contractor shall notify the appropriate office of the Department of
Transportation at least 72 hours prior to beginning construction.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. All materials shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and
materials for one (1) year following final acceptance by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate base course materials shall consist of crushed stone or uncrushed
gravel, or other similar material having hard, strong, durable particles free of
adherent coatings meeting the requirements of the NCDOT Standard
Specifications for Roads and Structures, latest edition for the project-specific
use of the aggregate.
B. The Contractor shall furnish aggregate base course material produced in
accordance with the requirements indicated herein for Type A, aggregate
unless otherwise specified in the special provisions.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 312230—Page 2

r
C. All aggregates shall be from approved sources. Sources will not be approved
unless the material has satisfactory soundness and satisfactory resistance to
abrasion. Satisfactory soundness will be considered to be a weighted average
loss of not greater than 15 percent when subjected to five (5) alternations of the
sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with AASHTO T104. Satisfactory
resistance to abrasion will be considered to be a percentage of wear of not
greater than 55 percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T96.
D. Aggregates shall be handled in such a manner as to minimize segregation
E. Sites for aggregate stockpiles shall be grubbed and cleaned prior to storing
aggregates, and the ground surface shall be firm, smooth, and well drained. A
cover of at least 3" of aggregate shall be maintained over the ground surface in
order to avoid the inclusion of soil or foreign material. Stockpiles shall be built
in such a manner as to minimize segregation. When it is necessary to operate
trucks or other equipment on a stockpile in the process of building the stockpile,
it shall be done in a manner approved by the Engineer.
F. Stockpiles of different types or sizes of aggregates shall be spaced far enough
apart, or else separated by suitable walls or partitions, to prevent the mixing of
the aggregates.
G. Any method of stockpiling aggregates which allows the stockpile to become
contaminated with foreign matter or causes excessive degradation of the
aggregate will not be permitted. Excessive degradation will be determined by
sieve tests of samples taken from any portion of the stockpile over which
equipment has been operated, and failure of such samples to meet all grading
requirements for the aggregate will be considered cause for discontinuance of
such stockpiling procedure.
H. Gradation: All standard sizes of aggregates shall meet the gradation
requirements when tested in accordance with AASHTO T27.
2.2 WATER
A. Water, if used in construction, shall be potable water, free from oil and other
deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The subgrade shall be dry and cleaned of all foreign substances prior to
constructing the base course.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 312230—Page 3

B. The surface of the subgrade shall be prepared as specified in Section 312000
"Earth Moving" based on the specified use of the aggregate base course.
3.2 PLACEMENT OF STONE BASE
A. The aggregate material shall be spread on the subgrade to a uniform loose
depth and without segregation.
B. Where the required compacted thickness of base is 10 inches or less the base
material may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required
compacted thickness of base is more than 10 inches, the base material shall be
spread and compacted in two (2) or more approximately equal layers. The
minimum compacted thickness of any one layer shall be approximately 4
inches.
C. Each layer of material shall have been sampled, tested, compacted, and
approved prior to placing succeeding layers of base material or pavement.
Such tests will be provided and paid for by the Owner, except that tests which
reveal non-conformance with the Specifications and all succeeding tests for the
same area, until conformance with the Specifications is established shall be at
the expense of the Contractor. The Owner will be responsible for paying for
only the successful tests. The minimum compaction for each layer shall be
100% standard proctor. I
D. No base material shall be placed on frozen subgrade or base. Hauling
equipment shall not be operated on subgrade or a previously completed layer of
base material soft enough to rut or weave beneath the equipment.
E. The maximum speed of trucks hauling or traveling over any part of the
subgrade or base shall be five (5) miles per hour.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Weather and Temperature Limitations:
1. Coarse aggregate base course shall not be placed during rainy weather or
on wet or frozen subgrade.
2. Stabilized aggregate base courses shall not be constructed when the
atmospheric temperature is below thirty-five (35) degrees F. when
measured in the shade away from artificial heat.
3. Any areas of completed base course that are damaged by elements such
as rain, sleet, snow, hail, or freeze/thaw conditions shall be reconditioned,
reshaped, and compacted in accordance with the Drawings and these
Specifications.
B. Tolerances:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 312230—Page 4

1. After final shaping and compacting the base, the Engineer will check the
surface of the base for conformance to grade and typical section and will
determine the base thickness.
2. The thickness of the base shall be within a tolerance of ±1/2-inch of the
base thickness required by the plans.
C. Maintenance:
1. Where the base material is placed in a trench section, the Contractor shall
provide adequate drainage through the shoulders to protect the subgrade
and base until such time as shoulders are completed.
2. The Contractor shall maintain the surface of the base by watering,
machining, and rolling or dragging when necessary to prevent damage to
I the base by weather or traffic.
1. Where the base or subgrade is damaged, repair the damaged area;
reshape the base to required lines, grades and typical sections; and
recompact the base to the required density at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 312230
June 2021 Project#21.00317 312230—Page 5

' SECTION 322905 RESTORATION OF SURFACES
ill I PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
i1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
I
necessary for the proper restoration of existing surfaces disturbed or damaged
as a result of construction operations which are not specifically scheduled or
specified for topsoil and seeding, paving, landscaping or other surfacing.
iB. In general, the types of replacement included in this section are seeding along
pipelines, concrete sidewalks, driveways, roadways, ditches, lawns and
landscaped areas, and curb and gutter.
C. Any damage to existing structures shall be repaired using materials and
workmanship equal to, or better than, those of the original construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CABC — Crushed aggregate base course.
B. NCDOT— North Carolina Department of Transportation.
C. PSI — Pounds per square inch.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the pertinent
specification sections referenced herein.
B. An appropriate concrete mix design shall be submitted for all concrete
sidewalks, driveways, roadways, and curb and gutter restored as part of this
project.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 322905-Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEEDING DISTURBED AREAS
A. All ground surfaces disturbed by construction activity, which are not classified
as lawns, landscaped areas, or pavement areas, but would be classified as
open fields, shall be raked smooth and seeded in accordance with the
appropriate paragraph(s) within Section 329200 entitled Turf and Grasses.
Large rocks, clumps of earth and excessive spoil material shall be removed
from the area prior to seeding.
B. Shoulders of all roads shall be restored as specified for lawns and landscaped
areas.
C. Wooded areas not classified as lawns shall be restored to as near their original
condition as possible.
3.2 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
A. Concrete walks removed in connection with, or damaged as a result of,
construction operations under the Contract shall be replaced with new
construction. Such walks shall be constructed of 4,000 PSI concrete on a
thoroughly compacted subgrade, shall have a vertical thickness, unless
otherwise noted, of not less than 4 inches or the thickness of the replaced walk
where greater than 4 inches.
B. Walks shall be float finished, edged with an edging tool, and grooved at
intermediate intervals not in excess of the width of the walk, uniform throughout
the length of the walk in any one direction.
3.3 DRIVEWAYS
A. Unless otherwise noted, unpaved driveways shall be surfaced with not less than
4 inches of CABC, topped with 4 inches of stone, gravel, or other materials
equal to that found in the original driveway. Driveways shall be left in a
condition better than their original condition.
B. Concrete drives shall be replaced with 4,000 PSI concrete and shall have equal
thickness and reinforcing steel to that of the original drive. Prior to placing the
concrete a 6-inch aggregate base course shall be placed in the drive area.
C. Unless otherwise noted, bituminous or asphaltic concrete drives shall be
restored to original base and asphalt thicknesses or a minimum of 6 inches of
June 2021 Project#21.00317 322905-Page 2

aggregate base course and a 2-inch surface course, whichever is greater. Base
material shall be compacted in 3-inch lifts and Type SF 9.5A or S 9.5B asphalt
compacted in 2-inch lifts to match existing pavement section.
3.4 ROADWAY REPLACEMENT
A. Bituminous or Asphaltic pavements shall include all areas paved with blacktop,
built up pavements or oil and stone, tar and stone and similar pavements
constructed with a bituminous or asphalt and stone materials.
B. Immediately upon completion of installation of underground piping and
structures, the trench shall be backfilled, and the roadway shall be repaired.
Provide materials as specified in the Contract Drawings. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the area adjacent to the excavation has not been damaged to the
extent that the base course need to be replaced, restoration may consist of a
surface course of sufficient thickness to meet the existing pavement.
C. Unless otherwise noted, bituminous or asphaltic concrete roadways shall be
restored to original base and asphalt thicknesses or a minimum of 6 inches of
aggregate base course and a 2-inch surface course, whichever is greater. Base
material shall be compacted in 3-inch lifts and Type SF 9.5A or S 9.5B asphalt
compacted in 2-inch lifts to match existing pavement section.
D. Portland cement concrete roadways shall be replaced with 4,000 PSI concrete
and shall have equal thickness and reinforcing steel as the original roadway.
An aggregate base course with a thickness of 6 inches shall be placed prior to
the placing of concrete.
E. Differential settlement of restored pavements shall be corrected immediately.
F. The Contractor shall repair and restripe any traffic markings that were
damaged, removed or covered during construction. All work shall be done in
accordance with NCDOT requirements and specifications.
G. All existing manhole and valve covers shall be raised, as required, by the
Contractor prior to paving. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit bid
prices for other related work and no additional payment shall be made.
3.5 DITCHES
A. Ditches shall be regraded to the original grade and line. The surface of all
ditches shall be returned to the same condition as found before commencing
work.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 322905-Page 3

3.6 LAWNS AND LANDSCAPED AREAS
A. Lawns and landscaped areas shall be regraded and replaced as follows:
1 . Grading shall be to the grade existing before construction of the work
under this Contract.
2. Lawn replacement shall be in accordance with the appropriate
paragraph(s) within Section 329200 entitled Turf and Grasses. Topsoiled
areas shall be replaced with topsoil of equal quality and quantity.
B. Landscaped areas shall be replaced with shrubs, hedges, ornamental trees,
flowers, or other items to original condition.
3.7 CURB AND GUTTER
A. Curb and gutter removed with or damaged as a result of construction
operations, injured or disturbed by the Contractor, his agents, or employees,
shall be replaced with new construction to a condition similar and equal to that
existing before damage was incurred. 4,000 PSI concrete shall be used in curb
and gutter replacement.
B. All work associated with curb and gutter replacement shall be in accordance
with Section 846-3 of the NCDOT Standard Specifications for Roads and
Structures (latest edition). Horizontal and vertical alignment of the curb and
gutter shall match that of the existing to the greatest extent practical, unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer.
3.8 DAMAGE TO STRUCTURES
A. Any damage to existing structures shall be repaired of materials and
workmanship equal to those of original construction. Extensively damaged
structures, where the structural stability has been affected or which cannot be
repaired in a suitable fashion shall be replaced entirely. Replacement shall not
commence until approval of the plan of replacement has been given by the
Engineer. Replacement costs shall be responsibility of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 322905
June 2021 Project#21.00317 322905-Page 4

SECTION 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Chain-link fences.
2. Swing gates.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. System Description: Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, all fencing will
be 6'-0" nominal height, using 2-inch, 9-gauge woven wire mesh fabric with 3
strands of barbed wire hung on angle brackets. The fencing will be supported
by posts and a top rail as shown on the drawings. The design and dimension of
the fence components shall be as shown on the drawings and as specified
herein unless specific design criteria indicated herein require a more robust
design.
B. Delegated Design: Design chain-link fences and gates, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7:
1. Minimum Post Size: Determine according to ASTM F 1043 for framework
up to 12 feet high, and post spacing not to exceed 10 feet for Schedule 40
Steel Pipe.
2. Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to
CLFMI WLG 2445, based on mesh size and pattern specified and on the
following:
a. Wind Loads: 90 miles per hour or local codes, whichever is greater.
b. Exposure Category: B.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 1

c. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.
d. Material Group: IA, ASTM F 1043, Schedule 40 steel pipe
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes for chain-link fences and gates.
1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.
2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
3. Accessories: Barbed wire and angle brackets.
4. Gates and hardware.
5. Gate operators, including operating instructions.
6. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting
arrangements.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work. Show accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational
clearances.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence, and gate, from
manufacturer.
D. Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals:
1. Gate hardware.
F. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall be reputable and shall be experienced in the
manufacture of chain link fencing.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates
shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify
dimensions by field measurements.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 2

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be
protected.
properly
1.8 WARRANTY
A. All material shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and
design for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and
bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product
Manual and with requirements indicated below:
1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch.
a. Mesh Size: 2 inches.
b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz./sq. ft.
with zinc coating applied before weaving.
c. Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the
weaving process with manufacturer's standard clear protective
coating.
3. Selvage: Twisted top and knuckled bottom.
2.2 FENCE FRAMING
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces,
and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum
dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the
following:
1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Heavy Industrial Strength: Material Group IA, round steel pipe,
Schedule 40
a. Line Post: 2.375 inches in diameter.
b. End, Corner and Pull Post: 2.875 inches.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 3

3. Horizontal Framework Members: Top rails complying with ASTM F 1043.
a. Top Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter.
4. Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:
a. Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average
zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft. zinc coating
per ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.3 TENSION WIRE
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch diameter, marcelled tension wire
complying with ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824, with the following metallic
coating:
1. Type II, zinc coated (galvanized), with the following minimum coating
weight:
a. Matching chain-link fabric coating weight. '
2.4 SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single and/or double
swing gate types.
1. Gate Leaf Width: As indicated.
2. Gate Fabric Height: As indicated.
B. Pipe and Tubing:
1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083;
protective coating and finish to match fence framing.
2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel.
3. Unless otherwise required by ASTM F 900, as a minimum, posts for swing
gates shall be sized according to the following gate leaf widths:
lb. per lin. ft.
Up to 6' 3-1/3" x 3-1/2" roll formed 5.14
section or 2-7\8" OD Pipe 5.79
Over 6' to 13' 4" OD Pipe 9.11
Over 13' to 18' 6-5/8" OD Pipe 18.97
Over 18' 8-5/8" OD Pipe 24.70
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 4

4. Gate Frames and Bracing: Gate frame members shall be 1.90" OD round
tubular steel and have 3/8-inch diameter adjustable truss rods.
C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.
D. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gate posts and frame end
members above top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame 12 inches to
attach barbed wire assemblies.
E. Hardware:
1. Hinges: 360-degree inward and outward swing.
2. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for
padlocking accessible from both sides of gate.
3. Padlock and Chain: Owner furnished.
4. Drive gates shall have a center plunger rod, catch, and semi-automatic
outer catch.
2.5 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B. Post Caps: Provide for each post.
1. Provide line post caps with loop to receive top rail.
C. Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
1. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6
inches long.
2. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting rails in the
fence line-to-line posts.
E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel.
F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of
chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each
corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.
G. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and
turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.
I
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 5
N

H. Barbed Wire Arms: Pressed steel with clips, slots, or other means for attaching
strands of barbed wire, and means for attaching to posts; for each post unless
otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Provide line posts with arms that accommodate top rail or tension wire.
2. Provide corner arms at fence corner posts, unless extended posts are
indicated.
3. Type I, single slanted arm.
I. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.
1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails,
and frames, complying with the following:
a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch diameter wire; galvanized
coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence
fabric.
J. Finish:
1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft.
zinc.
2.6 BARBED WIRE
A. Steel Barbed Wire: Comply with ASTM A 121, for two-strand barbed wire,
0.099-inch diameter line wire with 0.080-inch diameter, four-point round barbs
spaced not more than 5 inches on center.
1. Zinc Coating: Type Z, Class 3.
2.7 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout,
recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-
staining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with
potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and
grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water
exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that
is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise
permitted by Engineer.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed
intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of
utilities, sprinkler systems, underground structures, benchmarks, and property
monuments.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent
requirements indicated.
1. Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.
3.4 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and
spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.
B. Post Setting: Set posts in a foundation of 2,500 psi concrete at indicated
spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. Concrete foundation shall have a minimum
diameter 9 inches or three times the diameter of the post and shall be at least
36 inches deep.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing,
and hold in position during setting with concrete.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts
from concrete splatter.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 7

a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and
smooth to shed water.
b. Concealed Concrete: Leave the top of the concrete foundation 2
inches below grade to allow covering with surface material.
c. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset
and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and
sleeve with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions,
and finished sloped to drain water away from post.
d. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less
than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes
of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post
and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions,
and finished sloped to drain water away from post.
C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567
and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15
degrees or more.
D. Line Posts: Space line posts evenly at 10 feet or less apart true to line.
E. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and
alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire
with 0.120-inch diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire,
spaced a maximum of 24 inches on center. Install tension wire in locations
indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the
following locations:
1. Extended along bottom of fence fabric. Install bottom tension wire within 6
inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same
diameter and type of wire.
F. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and
alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to
radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post
caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings
as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.
G. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1
inch between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise
indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to
framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 8

H. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner,
pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches on
center.
I. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and
rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a
minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per
ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches on center and to
braces at 24 inches on center.
J. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the
fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent
removal of nuts.
K. Barbed Wire: Install barbed wire uniformly spaced, angled toward security side
of fence. Pull wire taut, install securely to extension arms, and secure to end
post or terminal arms.
L. Barbed Tape: Comply with ASTM F 1911. Install barbed tape uniformly in
configurations indicated and fasten securely to prevent movement or
displacement.
3.5 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and
secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach
hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items
in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate
where necessary.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding,
warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption,
or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and
locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link fences and gates.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 323113-Page 9

SECTION 329200 TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
necessary for the establishment of vegetation in all areas of the site disturbed
by construction operations and all earth surfaces of embankments including
rough and fine grading, topsoil if required, fertilizer, lime, seeding and mulching.
The Contractor shall adapt his operations to variations in weather or soil
conditions as necessary for the successful establishment and growth of the
grasses or legumes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly
decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.
B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending
mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil
or planting soil.
D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying,
repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides,
fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or
mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause
damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs,
mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted
plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-
place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 1

with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for
plant growth.
G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is
complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile and typified by the
lack of organic matter and soil organisms.
I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the
Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in
disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand
or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of
each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed
seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.
1. Evidence of State certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod and
plugs. Include identification of nursery source and name and telephone
number of supplier.
B. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.
C. Certificates of Inspection as required by law or governing authorities to
accompany shipments.
D. Source of mulch for approval and five (5) gallon bucketful physical sample.
E. Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for all work during normal seasons
for such work. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after
documentation of reasons for delays.
F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by
Owner for maintenance of turf and grasses during a calendar year. Submit
before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. No material substitutions will be permitted without the prior written approval of
the Engineer.
B. All materials shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 2

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Products shall be packed and shipped in a manner which will not damage them.
B. Damaged products shall be rejected upon delivery and promptly removed from
the site.
C. Products which must be stored prior to installation shall be protected from
damage and theft.
D. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original,
unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of
manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as
applicable. During handling and storing, the seed shall be cared for in such a
manner that it will be protected from damage by heat, moisture, rodents, or
other causes.
E. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways
and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of
bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust
reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments
with appropriate certificates.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Schedule and coordinate work with all trades involved.
B. Verify that the areas of work have been properly contoured and brought to final
grade prior to beginning work.
C. Consult record drawings and installers to determine actual underground utility
and drainage system locations in the vicinity of this work. Damage to known or
unrecorded utilities will be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
D. Notify the Engineer of any unforeseen conditions which will affect plant
installation or growth.
E. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate
planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required
maintenance from date of planting completion.
1. Optimum Spring Planting: April 1 — May 1.
2. Optimum Fall Planting: September 1 — October 1.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 3

F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and
optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather
conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled
employees. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately
after each area is planted and continue until Final Acceptance of the project by
the Owner.
B. Initial Meadow Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled
employees. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately
after each area is planted and continue until Final Acceptance of the project by
the Owner.
C. Continuing Maintenance Requirements: Throughout the warranty period of the
Work, excluding conditions of vandalism, theft, accident, acts of God and
Owner's negligent maintenance, Contractor shall be responsible for making any
and all necessary repairs to planted areas which may include or may result
from, the lack of fully established growth of turfs and grasses and/or soil erosion
from project areas. In such instances, Contractor shall be responsible for
restoring these areas to originally accepted conditions as well as full
establishment of turfs and grasses or other groundcovers in the area. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for any damages to adjacent areas
impacted by the lack of proper turf and grass establishment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERTILIZERS
A. The quality of fertilizer and all operations in connection with the furnishing of
this material shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Fertilizer
Law and regulations adopted by the North Carolina Board of Agriculture.
B. For all areas to be seeded which are not classified as lawns, but would be
classified as open fields, fertilizer shall be free-flowing, ready mixed 10-10-10
grade commercial fertilizer. Upon written approval of the Engineer a different
grade of fertilizer may be used, provided the rate of application is adjusted to
provide the same amounts of plant food.
C. For all areas to be seeded which are classified as lawns, fertilizer shall be as
follows:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 4

1. Fertilizer tablets: Agriform Planting Tablets 20-10-5 as manufactured by
Scotts-Sierra Horticultural Products, or equal, may be used at installer's
option.
2. Encapsulated fertilizer: Osmocote 19-6-12 as manufactured by Scotts-
Miracle Gro, or equal, may be used at installer's option.
D. During handling and storing, the fertilizer shall be cared for in such a manner
that it will be protected against hardening, caking, or loss of plant food values.
Any hardened or caked fertilizer shall be pulverized to its original conditions
before being used.
2.2 LIME
A. Lime: The quality of lime and all operations in connection with the furnishing of
this material shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 602, agricultural
liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate
equivalent and as follows:
1 . Class: 0, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and
a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.
2. Provide lime in the form of free-flowing ground dolomitic limestone.
B. During the handling and storing, the lime shall be cared for in such a manner
that it will be protected against hardening and caking. Any hardened or caked
lime shall be pulverized to its original condition before being used.
2.3 SEED
A. Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the
requirements of the North Carolina Seed Law and regulations adopted by the
North Carolina Board of Agriculture.
B. Seed shall have been approved by the North Carolina Department of
Agriculture or any agency approved by the Engineer before being sown, and no
seed will be accepted with a date of test more than nine (9) months prior to the
date of sowing. Such testing, however, will not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for furnishing and sowing seed that meets these specifications at
the time of sowing. When a low percentage of germination causes the quality
of the seed to fall below the minimum pure live seed specified, the Contractor
may elect, subject to the approval of the Engineer, to increase the rate of
seeding sufficiently to obtain the minimum pure live seed contents specified,
provided that such an increase in seeding does not cause the quantity of
noxious weed seed per square yard to exceed the quantity that would be
allowable at the regular rate of seed.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 5

C. During handling and storing, the seed shall be cared for in such a manner that it
will be protected from damage by heat, moisture, rodents, or other causes.
D. Seed shall be entirely free from bulblets or seed of Johnson Grass, Nutgrass,
Sandbur, Wild Onion, Wild Garlic, and Bermuda Grass. The specifications for
restricted noxious weed seed refers to the number per pound, singly or
collectively, of Blessed Thistle, Wild Radish, Canada Thistle, Corncockle, Field
Bindweed, Quackgrass, Dodders, Dock, Horsenettle, Bracted Plantain,
Buckhorn or Wild Mustard; but in no case shall the number of Blessed Thistle
or Wild Radish exceed 27 seeds of each per pound. No tolerance on weed
seed will be allowed.
E. Seed Purity: All seed species shall consist of seed with not less than a 95
percent germination rate, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more
than 0.5 percent weed seed:
2.4 MULCH
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, threshed straw of
wheat, rye, or oats which is free of noxious weeds or other species which would
grow and be detrimental to the specified grass.
B. Wood Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic
and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture
content of 10 percent (±2 percent); organic matter 99.4 percent (±0.2 percent);
ash content 0.6 percent (±0.2 percent) water holding capacity of 1050 grams
water/100 grams dry fiber. and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.
2.5 TACKIFIER
A. Tackifier shall consist of an asphalt emulsion in accordance with ASTM D 977,
Grade SS-1 ; shall be nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.
2.6 WATER
A. Water shall be clean, clear water free from any objectionable or harmful
chemical qualities or organisms and shall be furnished by the Contractor.
2.7 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-
fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's
recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 6

B. Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, non-biodegradable slope-stabilization mats
designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface.
Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint
washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils,
gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or
acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.
2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy
conditions.
3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of
excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable
levels to attain the required results.
4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is
too dusty.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil
within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by
Engineer and replace with new planting soil.
3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, UTILITIES, TREES AND
VEGETATION
A. Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities,
trees, shrubs, and plantings indicated to remain in place against unnecessary
cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, and
smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated
materials, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line.
Provide wood or metal stakes 48 inches in height, set on eight (8) to 10-foot
centers, connected by 2-inch minimum brightly colored flagging tape or fabric
fencing to protect trees and vegetation to remain. Set perimeter of protection at
the drip line of trees to remain unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
B. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter cut during construction
operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 7

coating, formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover
exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out and cover with
earth as soon as possible.
C. The Contractor shall not remove or damage trees and shrubs which are outside
the Clearing Limits established by the Owner or those within the Clearing Limits
designated to remain.
D. Repair trees scheduled to remain and damaged by construction operations in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer. Repair damaged trees promptly to prevent
progressive deterioration caused by damage.
E. Replace trees scheduled to remain and damaged beyond repair by construction
operations, as determined by the Engineer, with trees of similar size and
species. Repair and replacement of trees scheduled to remain and damaged
by construction operations or lack of adequate protection during construction
operations shall be at the Contractor's expense.
F. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding, hydromulching, and
tackifier overspray.
G. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
3.3 GRADING
A. Rough grading shall be done as soon as all excavation required in the area has
been backfilled. The necessary earthwork shall be accomplished to bring the
existing ground to the desired finish elevations as shown on the Contract
Drawings or otherwise directed.
B. Fine grading shall consist of shaping the final contours for drainage and
removing all large rock, clumps of earth, roots, and waste construction
materials. It shall also include thorough loosening of the soil to a depth of 6" by
plowing, discing, harrowing or other approved methods until the area is
acceptable as suitable for subsequent landscaping operations. The work of
landscaping shall be performed on a section-by-section basis immediately upon
completion of earthwork.
C. Upon failure or neglect on the part of the Contractor to coordinate his grading
with seeding and mulching operations and diligently pursue the control of
erosion and siltation, the Engineer may suspend the Contractor's grading
operations until such time as the work is coordinated in a manner acceptable to
the Engineer.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200- Page 8

3.4 SECURING AND PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be secured from areas from which topsoil has not been previously
removed, either by erosion or mechanical methods. Topsoil shall not be
removed to a depth in excess of the depth approved by the Engineer.
B. The area or areas from which topsoil is secured shall possess such uniformity
of soil depth, color, texture, drainage, and other characteristics as to offer
assurance that, when removed, the product will be homogeneous in nature and
will conform to the requirements of these specifications.
C. All areas from which topsoil is to be secured, shall be cleaned of all sticks,
boards, stones, lime, cement, ashes, cinders, slag, concrete, bitumen or its
residue and any other effuse which will hinder or prevent growth.
D. In securing topsoil from a designated pit, or elsewhere, should strata or seams
of material occur which do not come under the requirements for topsoil, such
material shall be removed from the topsoil or if required by the Engineer; the pit
shall be abandoned.
E. Before placing or depositing topsoil upon any areas, all improvement within the
area shall be completed, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The
areas in which topsoil is to be placed or incorporated shall be prepared before
securing topsoil for use.
F. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties
and walkways.
3.5 SEEDBED PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall cut and satisfactorily dispose of weeds or other
unacceptable growth on the areas to be seeded. Uneven and rough areas
outside of the graded section, such as crop rows, farm contours, ditches and
ditch spoil banks, fence line and hedgerow soil accumulations, and other minor
irregularities which cannot be obliterated by normal seedbed preparation
operations, shall be shaped and smoothed as directed by the Engineer to
provide for more effective seeding and for ease of subsequent mowing
operations.
B. The soil shall then be scarified or otherwise loosened to a depth of not less than
6 inches except as otherwise provided below or otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Clods shall be broken and the top 2 to 3 inches of soil shall be
worked into an acceptable seedbed by the use of soil pulverizers, drags, or
harrows; or by other methods approved by the Engineer.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 9

C. On 2:1 slopes a seedbed preparation will be required that is the same depth as
that required on flatter areas, although the degree of smoothness may be
reduced from that required on the flatter areas if so permitted by the Engineer.
D. On cut slopes that are steeper than 2:1, both the depth of preparation and the
degree of smoothness of the seedbed may be reduced as permitted by the
Engineer, but in all cases the slope surface shall be scarified, grooved,
trenched, or punctured so as to provide pockets, ridges, or trenches in which
the seeding materials can lodge.
E. On cut slopes that are either 2:1 or steeper, the Engineer may permit the
preparation of a partial or complete seedbed during the grading of the slope. If
at the time of seeding and mulching operations such preparation is still in a
condition acceptable to the Engineer, additional seedbed preparation may be
reduced or eliminated.
F. The preparation of seedbeds shall not be done when the soil is frozen,
extremely wet, or when the Engineer determines that it is in an otherwise
unfavorable working condition.
G. Limestone may be applied at the rate described below as a part of the seedbed
preparation, provided it is immediately worked into the soil. If not so applied,
limestone and fertilizer shall be applied as described below.
ICI
3.6 APPLICATION OF LIMESTONE, FERTILIZER, SEED, AND MULCH
(GENERAL)
A. Equipment to be used for the application, covering or compaction of limestone,
fertilizer, and seed shall have been approved by the Engineer before being
used on the project. Approval may be revoked at any time if equipment is not
maintained in satisfactory working condition, or if the equipment operation
damages the seed.
B. Limestone, fertilizer, seed and mulch shall be applied within 24 hours after
completion of seedbed preparation unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer,
but no limestone or fertilizer shall be distributed and no seed shall be sown
when the Engineer determines that weather and soil conditions are unfavorable
for such operations.
3.7 FERTILIZATION AND LIMING
A. Following seedbed preparation, fertilizer shall be applied to all areas to be
seeded so as to achieve the application rates shown below. Fertilizer shall be
spread evenly over the seedbed and shall be lightly harrowed, raked, or
otherwise incorporated into the soil for a depth of 1/2 inch.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 10

B. Fertilizer need not be incorporated in the soil as specified above when mixed
with seed in water and applied with power sprayer equipment. The seed shall
not remain in water containing fertilizer for more than 30 minutes when a
hydraulic seeder is used.
C. Agricultural limestone shall be thoroughly mixed into the soil according to the
rates indicated below. The specified rate of limestone application may be
reduced by the Engineer if pH tests indicate this to be desirable. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to obtain such tests and submit the results to the
Engineer for adjustment in rates.
D. In the absence of a soil test, the following rates of application of fertilizer and
lime shall be to all areas to be seeded which are not classified as lawns, but
would be classified as open fields:
1. Lime: 4,000 pounds per acre
2. Fertilizer: 1,000 pounds per acre
E. For all areas to be seeded which are classified as lawns, fertilizer and lime shall
be applied at the following rates:
1. Lime: 92 pounds per 1,000 square feet
2. Fertilizer: 23 pounds per 1,000 square feet
F. When adverse seeding conditions are encountered due to steepness of slope,
height of slope, or soil conditions, the Engineer may direct or permit that
modifications be made in the above requirements which pertain to incorporating
limestone into the seedbed; covering limestone, seed, and fertilizer; and
compacting the seedbed. Such modifications may include but not be limited to
the following:
1. The incorporation of limestone into the seedbed may be omitted on:
a. Cut slopes steeper than 2:1;
b. On 2:1 cut slopes when a seedbed has been prepared during the
excavation of the cut and is still in an acceptable condition; or
c. on areas of slopes where the surface of the area is too rocky to
permit the incorporation of the limestone.
G. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make an additional application
of maintenance fertilizer in the amount of 650 pounds per acre (15 pounds per
1,000 square feet) following the initial establishment of groundcover. This
application shall occur when vegetation is three (3) inches in height or 45 days
after initial seeding, whichever comes first.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 11

3.8 SEEDING
A. Seeding shall commence as soon as preparation of the seedbed has been
completed. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph
or until the surface is suitable for working and is in proper condition. Seed
mixtures may be sown together provided they are kept in a thoroughly mixed
condition during the seeding operation.
B. All disturbed areas shall be seeded unless specifically indicated to receive other
types of plantings or groundcovers.
ni method
Seed may be uniformly sown over the seedbed by a mechanical met od
suitable for the slopes and size of the areas to be seeded. Broadcast type
seeders, windmill hand seeder or approved mechanical power drawn seed drills
may be utilized.
1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
2. Do not seed against existing trees.
D. For all areas to be seeded which are not classified as lawns, but would be
classified as open fields, seed species and application rates shall be as follows:
1. Spring/Summer (Normally April 1 to August 31):
a. 100 pounds of Ky-31 tall fescue per acre.
2. Fall and Winter (Normally September 1 to March 31):
a. 85 pounds of Ky-31 tall fescue and 15 pounds of rye grain per acre.
3. On cut and fill slopes having 2:1 or steeper slopes, add 15 pounds of
sudangrass to the planned seeding in summer seeding or 25 pounds of
rye cereal per acre in fall and winter seeding, if seeded September to
February.
4. These seeding rates are prescribed for all sites with less than 50 percent
ground cover and for sites with more than 50 percent ground cover where
complete seeding is necessary to establish effective erosion control
vegetative cover. On sites having 50 to 80 percent ground cover where
complete seeding is not necessary to establish vegetative cover, reduce
the seeding rate at least one-half the normal rate.
E. For all areas to be seeded which are classified as lawns, seed species and
application rates shall be as follows:
1. "Rebel" turftype fescue 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet
2. "Falcon" turftype fescue 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet
Total Mix 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 12

F. Care shall be taken to adjust the seeder for seeding at the proper rate before
seeding operations are started and to maintain their adjustment during seeding.
Seed in hoppers shall be agitated to prevent segregation of the various seeds in
the mixture.
G. Immediately after application, harrow, drag, rake, or otherwise work seedbed so
as to cover the seed with a layer of soil. The depth of covering shall be as
directed by the Engineer. If two kinds of seed are to be used which require
different depths of covering, they shall be sown separately.
H. When a combination seed and fertilizer drill is used, fertilizer may be drilled in
with the seed after limestone has been applied and worked into the soil. If two
kinds of seed are being used which require different depths of cover, the seed
requiring the lighter cover may be sown broadcast or with a special attachment
to the drill or drilled lightly following the initial drilling operation.
1. The rates of application of limestone, fertilizer, and seed on slopes 2:1 or
steeper or on rocky surfaces may be reduced or eliminated.
2. Compaction after seeding may be reduced or eliminated on slopes 2:1 or
steeper, on rocky surfaces, or on other areas where soil conditions would
make compaction undesirable.
I. Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where shown on Drawings;
Iinstall and anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 MULCHING
A. All seeded areas shall be uniformly mulched in a continuous blanket
I immediately after seeding. The mulch shall be applied so as to permit some
sunlight to penetrate and the air to circulate and at the same time, shade the
grounds, reduce erosion and conserve soil moisture. Approximately 25 percent
of the ground shall be visible through the mulch blanket.
B. To achieve the coverage described above, it will be necessary to apply straw
mulch to seeded areas at a rate of approximately 4,000 pounds per acre (92
pounds per 1 ,000 square feet) or wood fiber mulch at a rate of 1,600 pounds 1
per acre (37 pounds per 1,000 square feet).
C. Mulch shall be uniformly spread by hand or by approved mechanical spreaders
or blowers which will provide an acceptable application as described above.
D. Before mulch is applied on cut or fill slopes which are 3:1 or flatter, and ditch
slopes, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of all exposed stones in
excess of 3 inches in diameter and all roots or other debris which will prevent
proper contact of the mulch with the soil.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 13 I

E. Care shall be exercised to prevent displacement of soil or seed or other
damage to the seeded area during the mulching operations.
F. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent mulch from entering
drainage structures through displacement by wind, water, or other causes and
shall promptly remove any blockage to drainage facilities which may occur.
3.10 TACKIFIER
A. Emulsified asphalt or organic tackifier shall be sprayed uniformly on mulch as it
is ejected from blower or immediately thereafter. Tackifier shall be applied
evenly over area creating uniform appearance. Application rates and method of
application will vary with conditions, be approved by the Engineer, and shall be
applied in sufficient amount to assure that the mulch is properly held in place.
Where the binding material is not applied directly with the mulch it shall be
applied immediately following the mulch operation.
B. The Contractor shall cover/protect structures, poles, fences, and other
appurtenances if mulch binder is applied in such a way that it may come in
contact with or discolor those structures or appurtenances. Mulch and binder
shall be applied by suitable blowing equipment at closely controlled application
rates in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
C. Asphalt shall not be used in freezing weather.
3.11 HYDROSEEDING
A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using
equipment specifically designed for hydroseeding applications. Continue
mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic
application.
1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch tackifier in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Fiber mulch shall be mixed into the slurry such that the application rate of
the fiber mulch is 1 ,500 to 2,000 pounds per acre.
3. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process in
accordance with the application rates described herein.
B. When a hydraulic seeder is used for application of seed and fertilizer, the seed
shall not remain in water containing fertilizer for more than 30 minutes prior to
application unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 14

3.12 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Install all erosion control materials in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on Drawings.
3.13 TURF RENOVATION
A. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of
materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.
1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor
regrading is required.
2. Install new planting soil as required.
B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not
bury in soil.
C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills,
stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's
operations, and replace with new planting soil.
D. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.
E. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective
herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.
F. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass,
vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
G. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.
H. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf
and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to
fill low spots and meet finish grades.
I. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new turf.
J. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.
3.14 TURF MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall keep all seeded areas in good condition, reseeding and
mowing if and when necessary, as directed by the Engineer, until a good lawn
is established over the entire area seeded and shall maintain these areas in an
approved condition until final acceptance of the Contract.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 15

B. Grassed areas will be accepted when a 95 percent cover by permanent grasses
is obtained and weeds are not dominant. On slopes, the Contractor shall
provide against washouts by an approved method. Any washouts which occur
shall be regraded and reseeded until a good sod is established.
C. Areas of damage or failure due to any cause shall be corrected by repair or by
being completely redone as may be directed by the Engineer. Areas of damage
or failure resulting either from negligence on the part of the Contractor in
performing subsequent construction operations or from not taking adequate
precautions to control erosion and siltation as required throughout the various
sections of the specifications shall be repaired by the Contractor as directed by
the Engineer at no cost to the Owner.
3.15 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean
wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or
other paved areas.
B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect
newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout
initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.
C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment
period.
END OF SECTION 329200
June 2021 Project#21.00317 329200-Page 16

SECTION 332700 SANITARY SEWER PIPE AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
B. Where specific standards are referenced within this document, the most current
specification and/or latest revision shall apply.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and fittings.
2. Valves and appurtenances.
3. Transition couplings.
4. Manholes and appurtenances.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, incidentals, and temporary facilities
necessary to install and complete the sanitary sewer and/or force main
installation in accordance with the plans. All pipe and appurtenance material
shall be of the type and class specified herein.
B. All pipeline and appurtenance excavation, bedding, pipe laying, jointing and
coupling of pipe joints and backfilling shall be completed as described herein.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. AASHTO — American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
B. ACPA — American Concrete Pavement Association
C. ANSI — American National Standards Institute
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 1

D. API — American Petroleum Institute
E. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials
F. AWWA —American Water Works Association
G. CFM — Cubic Feet per Minute
H. DIP — Ductile Iron Pipe
I. HDD — Horizontal Directional Drilling
J. HDPE — High Density Polyethylene
K. LB — Pound
L. Min. - Minute
M. NFPA — National Fire Protection Association
N. NSF — National Sanitation Foundation
O. NSPT — National Standard Pipe Thread
P. PE — Polyethylene
Q. PPM — Parts Per Million
R. PSI — Pounds per Square Inch
S. PSIG — Pounds per Square Inch (Gauge)
T. PVC — Polyvinyl Chloride
U. RCP — Reinforced Concrete Pipe
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 of
these specifications.
B. Shop drawings or submittals shall be required for the following:
1. Drawings and descriptive data on manholes (including wall thicknesses,
vertical dimensions, and deflection angles), concrete used in manufacture
of manholes and precast inverts, rubber gaskets, joint sealant, flexible
manhole sleeves and joints, frames and covers, inverts, and manhole
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 2

steps shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to their
manufacture.
2. All sizes and types of pipe.
i
3. All pipe fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
4. All transition couplings.
C. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other
services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and
valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties valves and appurtenances to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
E. When utilized on the project, the Contractor shall submit detailed plans and a
description outlining all provisions and precautions to be taken by the
Contractor regarding the handling of existing wastewater flows during the sewer
line connections, replacement or startup of the sewage pumps. This plan must
be specific and complete, including such items as schedules, locations,
elevations, capacities of equipment, materials and all other incidental items
necessary and/or required to ensure proper protection of the facilities, including
I protection of the access and bypass pumping locations from damage due to the
discharge flows, and compliance with the requirements and permit conditions.
The submitted work schedule shall minimize the interruption and/or bypassing
1 of wastewater flow during construction. The plan shall include the use of a
"High Water Alarm" in the manhole or structure used for bypass pumping. The
submittals shall include electrical schematics and control panel information for
I the pumps including start/stop and alarming configurations. No construction
shall begin until all provisions and requirements have been reviewed by the
Owner. The Contractor shall allow 30 days for review of this plan.
1 1. The plan shall include but not limited to details of the following:
I a. Staging areas for pumps;
b. Plan showing proposed equipment and piping layouts including
details of tie-ins to existing sewer lines and/or force mains;
I c. List of pump sizes, valves, piping, fittings and other appurtenances;
d. Method of noise control for each pump and/or generator;
e. Method for controlling and monitoring the pumps.
f. Contingency plan for a sanitary sewer overflow caused by the
diversion of the sewer flow.
I
I
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 3
1

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall coordinate material deliveries with the
manufacturer/supplier. All materials shall be handled and stored in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations using methods that will prevent
damage to the materials. Further, all manhole components shall be handled
and stored in accordance with the ASTM C891.
B. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and
corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent
rattling.
C. The Contractor shall unload pipe and appurtenances so as to avoid deformation
or other injury thereto. Pipe shall not be placed within pipe of a larger size and
shall not be rolled or dragged over gravel or rock during handling. If any
defective material is discovered after installation, it shall be removed and
replaced with sound pipe or shall be repaired by the Contractor in an approved
manner and at his own expense.
D. The Contractor shall store all pipe and appurtenances on sills above storm
drainage level and deliver for laying after the trench is excavated. Do not store
any plastic materials in direct sunlight. All plastic materials shall be supported to
prevent sagging and bending. All plastic materials shall also be covered with
tarps if exposed to the elements for extended periods of time.
E. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
F. Handle all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
G. When any material is damaged during transporting, unloading, handling, or
storing, the undamaged portions may be used as needed, or, if damaged
sufficiently, the Engineer will reject the material as being unfit for installation.
The Engineer will reject any ductile iron pipe with a damaged cement lining.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: The interruption of sewer
flows within the collection system or service to any occupied structure or facility
will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the utility owner. The
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining sewer flows at all times.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 4

I
I
1. When by-pass pumping of sewer flows is necessary, the Contractor shall
I submit a by-pass pumping work plan to the Engineer and utility owner in
conjunction with the submittal of a construction schedule. The plan shall
include a primary pump and an identical standby pump.
I2. Notify Engineer and utility owner no fewer than 72 hours in advance of
proposed by-pass pumping of sewer flows.
I3. Do not proceed with by-pass pumping of sewer flows without utility
owner's written permission.
I
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1 . Comply with all requirements of utility owner providing sanitary sewer
Iservice including the connection of new collection system piping.
2. Comply with all standards of authorities having jurisdiction for sanitary
1 sewer service piping, including materials, installation, and testing.
B. All piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
Itesting agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: All associated materials
I shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
ID. The design, installation and operation of any temporary pumping system, when
required to maintain sewer flows in the existing system, shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall demonstrate experience in the
I design and operation of temporary bypass pumping systems or employ the
services of a vendor who can demonstrate this experience. The Contractor or
vendor shall provide at least five (5) references of projects of a similar size and
I
complexity as this project performed within the past three (3) years. The bypass
system shall meet the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having
jurisdiction.
I
1.9 COORDINATION
IA. Coordinate any connections to the existing sanitary sewer with the utility owner.
I
I
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 5
I

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BYPASS PUMPING EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment:
1. All pumps utilized for bypass pumping shall be centrifugal, end suction,
fully automatic self-priming units that do not require the use of foot valves
in the priming system. The pumps may be electric or diesel powered. All
used must pumps be constructed to allow dry running for long periods of
time to accommodate the cyclical nature of sewer flows. The pumps shall
not be hydraulic submersible type.
2. Pumps shall be equipped with sound attenuation enclosures which reduce
operating noise to 66 dB at 30 feet. Pump sizing shall be in accordance
with this Specification.
3. The bypass pumping system shall include the necessary stop/start
controls for the pumps.
4. The Contractor shall have adequate standby equipment available and
ready for immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or
breakdown. A backup pump of size equal to the largest bypass pump
shall be included. The backup pump shall be on-line, isolated from the
primary system by a valve.
5. Temporary discharge piping shall be constructed of rigid pipe with
positive, restrained joints. Aluminum "irrigation" type piping or glued PVC
pipe will not be allowed. Discharge hose will only be allowed in short
sections and as accepted by the Owner.
6. Allowable piping shall be as specified herein or as otherwise approved in
writing by the Engineer.
B. System Description:
1 . Design Requirements:
a. The bypass pumping system shall have sufficient capacity to pump a
peak flow equal to or greater than the capacity of the sewer line
being bypassed. The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and
operate all necessary pipeline plugs, pumps of adequate size to
handle the peak flow, and temporary discharge piping to ensure that
the total influent flow can be safely diverted around the affected
section to be repaired or replaced. Bypass pumping systems will be
required to be operated 24 hours per day from the time the existing
sewer line is removed from service until the new sewer line is put
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 6

I
I
into service and has been determined to be Substantially Complete
by the Owner.
b. Temporary bypass pumping during construction may be
accomplished by utilizing existing sanitary sewer manholes upstream
and downstream of the affected section. The Contractor shall verify
location of all utilities, size of fittings, couplings and all other bypass
requirements as previously noted. The bypass connection and piping
shall be installed and tested prior to bypassing.
c. When bypass pumping from an existing valve vault or pump station,
the Contractor shall verify that all necessary components of the
existing system are in good working condition. The Owner shall be
responsible for operating these valves during construction/upgrades
at existing facilities. The Contractor shall coordinate with the
Owner's personnel regarding the operation of these facilities and
providing a minimum of five (5) days' notice to the Owner prior to
conducting any verification or performing any construction
operations.
2.2 PIPE MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be first quality with smooth interior and exterior surfaces, free
from cracks, blisters, honeycombs, and other imperfections, and true to
' theoretical shapes and forms throughout. All materials shall be subject to the
inspection of the Engineer at the plant, trench, or other point of delivery, for the
purpose of culling and rejecting materials which do not conform to the
requirements of these specifications. Such material shall be marked by the
Engineer and the Contractor shall remove it from the project site upon notice
being received of its rejection.
B. As particular specifications are cited, the designation shall be construed to refer
to the latest revision under the same specification number, or to superseding
specifications under a new number except provisions in revised specifications
which are clearly inapplicable.
2.3 DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE (DIP) — GRAVITY SEWER AND FORCE
MAINS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe shall be as manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151 ,
ASTM A-746, ANSI Specification A21.50 and A21.51 and shall be Class 350
unless otherwise specified on the drawings or in the Bid Schedule.
1. The pipe interior shall be cement mortar lined and seal coated, standard
thickness, in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.4.
2. The exterior of all pipe shall be coated with either a coal or asphaltic base
bituminous pipe coating in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.8.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 7

3. Pipe shall be furnished with Slip Joints, Mechanical Joints, or Flanged
Joints as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the
specifications described below:
B. Slip Joints: Slip or "push-on" joints shall be manufactured in accordance with
AWWA C111 . Pipe thickness shall be Class 350 as determined by AWWA
C150.
1. Bells of"slip" joint pipe shall be contoured to receive a bulbshaped circular
rubber gasket, and plain ends shall have a slight taper to facilitate
installation. The gasket and associated lubricant shall be furnished by the
pipe manufacturer and shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI
Specification A21.11.
2. The jointing shall be done by guiding the plain end into the bell until
contact is made with the gasket and by exerting a sufficient compressive
force to drive the joint home until plain end makes full contact with the
base of the bell. In force main installations, no joint may exceed a
maximum deflection of 11 inches in an 18-foot joint of pipe (3 degrees).
C. Restrained-Joint Ductile Iron Pipe:
1. All restrained joint pipe shall be ductile iron, manufactured in accordance
with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21 .51. The rated working
pressure for pipe sizes 4-inch through 24-inch shall be 350 PSI and 250
PSI for pipe sizes 30-inch through 64-inch as determined by AWWA C150
unless otherwise noted. Push-on joints for such pipe shall be in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.
2. Restrained joints shall be restrained push-on joints, TR Flex by U.S. Pipe
and Foundry; Lok-Fast by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, or equal.
Joints shall be suitable for 250 psi working pressure and be fabricated of
heavy section ductile iron casting. Bolts and nuts shall be low carbon steel
conforming to ASTM A307, Grade B.
3. External loading conditions shall not deflect the pipe more than 3% in the
horizontal direction.
D. Mechanical-Joint Ductile Iron Pipe:
1. All mechanical joint pipe shall be ductile iron manufactured in accordance
with AWWA C111. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA
C151, and the pipe thickness shall be Class 350 as determined by AWWA
C150 unless otherwise noted.
2. All bolts shall be tightened by means of torque wrenches in such a manner
that the follower shall be brought up toward the pipe evenly. If effective
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 8

I
I
sealing is not obtained by tightening the bolts to the specified torques, the
joint shall be disassembled and reassembled after thorough cleaning.
3. Bolts for mechanical joints shall be high grade steel, low alloy type, with
tee or hex head and American Standard threads. Mechanical joint gland
shall be gray iron and shall utilize a plain rubber gasket.
E. Flanged-Joint Ductile Iron Pipe:
1. Flanged pipe shall have flanges with long hubs, shop fitted on the
threaded end of the pipe.
2. Where required, flanges shall be tapped for stud bolts. Flanges shall be
accurately faced at right angles to the pipe axis and shall be drilled
smooth and true, and covered with coal tar pipe varnish or otherwise
protected against corrosion of flange faces. Flange faces shall be cleaned
to bare metal with wire brushed before installation of pipe.
3. Ductile iron J
flanged joint pipe shall have a thickness of Class 53 minimum
9
and shall conform to AWWA C110 and AWWA C115. Pipe shall be
ordered in lengths needed as no pipe shall be cut, threaded or flanged in
the field. All pipe shall have Class 125 flanges conforming to AWWA
C110 unless otherwise specified.
4. Flanged joints shall be made up with through bolts of the required size.
Bolts shall be zinc plated, with good and sound, well fitting threads, so that
the nuts may be turned freely by hand.
5. Flanged joints shall be made up using only full-face gaskets with a
minimum thickness of 1/8-inch. Ring gaskets are not acceptable. Gasket
material shall be rubber or approved equal as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
6. Connecting flanges shall be in proper alignment and no external force
shall be used to bring them together.
F. Long Span Pipe: "Long span" type ductile iron pipe shall be used for
unsupported spans greater than 20'-0". "Long span" ductile iron pipe and
I associated pipe joints shall be designed by the pipe manufacturer specifically
for elevated crossings with unsupported spans shown on the drawings. The
Contractor shall submit shop drawings from the pipe manufacturer for the long
span pipe. Shop drawings shall include material specifications for the pipe and
joints and shall specify locations of joints with respect to the pier locations
shown on the drawings. Long span ductile iron pipe shall be as manufactured
by American, U.S. Pipe, or equal.
I
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 9

2.4 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE SEWER PIPE (PVC)
A. Gravity: Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall be as manufactured in accordance with
ASTM D-3034, latest edition, and shall be suitable for use as a gravity sanitary
sewer pipe. The standard dimension ratio (SDR) shall be 35 unless otherwise
specified on the contract drawings.
B. All polyvinyl chloride pipe joints shall be of an integral bell and spigot of the
same material as the pipe. It shall have a solid cross-section with rubber "0"
ring securely locked in place at the point of manufacture.
C. Force Main: Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be as manufactured in accordance
with ASTM D-2241, latest edition, and shall be suitable for use as a sanitary
sewer force main pipe. The standard dimension ratio (SDR) shall be 18 or 21
as shown on the contract drawings. PVC force main piping shall have a green
exterior color. Under no circumstances shall pipe with a blue exterior color be
accepted. No pipe joint may exceed a maximum deflection of 11 inches in an
18-foot joint of pipe (3 degrees).
D. Where PVC pipe is installed in iron pipe size (IPS), an IPS gasket shall be
furnished with each fitting to ensure compatibility.
2.5 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE (HDPE)
A. High-density polyethylene pipe may be used in the horizontal directional drilling
(HDD) of sewer force mains as indicated on the project drawings. Piping shall
be extruded from a polyethylene compound and shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. The polyethylene resin shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM
D3350 for PE 3408 material with a cell classification of 335434C or better.
2. The polyethylene compound shall be suitably protected against
degradation by ultraviolet light by means of carbon black, well dispersed
by precompounding in a concentration not less than 2 percent.
3. The maximum allowable hoop stress shall be 800 psi at 73.4 °F.
4. The pipe manufacturer shall be listed with the Plastic Pipe Institute as
meeting the recipe and mixing requirements of the resin manufacturer for
the resin used to manufacture the pipe in this project.
5. The pipe and bends shall have a minimum standard dimension ratio
(SDR) wall thickness as specified by the Engineer.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 10

6. Joining shall be performed by thermal butt-fusion in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
7. Sanitary sewer pipe exterior shall be green in color or contain green
striping.
2.6 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS (For Use In Force Main Appurtenances Only)
A. Brass goods furnished under this specification shall be new and unused. All
brass pipe and fittings utilized in the assembly of force main appurtenances
shall be seamless red brass (copper alloy 230) in accordance with ASTM B43.
Metal alloy composition shall be as follows:
1. Copper: 84.0% to 86.0%
2. Lead: 0.05% max.
3. Iron: 0.05% max.
4. Zinc: Remainder (approximately 15%)
B. All brass pipe and fittings shall be regular weight (schedule 40) with threaded
ends in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Unless otherwise noted, all pipe and fittings shall have a minimum working
water pressure of 150 psi and shall conform to AWWA Standard C800.
D. All fittings shall either be stamped or embossed with the manufacturer's name.
2.7 FITTINGS — DIP AND PVC FORCE MAINS
A. Fittings in DIP and PVC force mains shall be required where the sanitary sewer
force main has a significant change in alignment or grade. The specifications
for the force main fittings are described below:
1. All fittings for any type of sewer force main shall be ductile iron mechanical
joint fittings manufactured in accordance with ANSI Specification A-21.1
and AWWA Standard C153 (compact body type) for underground piping
for 3 inch through 24-inch diameter fittings and AWWA C110 (full body
type) for pipe diameters larger than 24 inches. Where flanged pipe is
used ductile iron fittings shall be flanged in accordance with AWWA C153
or AWWA C110 (based on sizing as stated above) for exposed piping. All
flanges shall be Class 125 unless otherwise noted.
2. The interior of all fittings shall be cement mortar lined (not less than 1/16-
inch), seal coated in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.4 and
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 11

AWWA C-104, and suitable for a minimum working pressure of 250 PSI
unless otherwise specified.
2.8 GASKETS
A. All rubber gaskets for DIP and PVC pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with
AWWA C111. All gaskets shall be a product of the pipe manufacturer, made
specifically for the pipe being installed, and shall match the shape and
configuration of the joint.
B. Gaskets for ductile iron restrained joint shall be push-on pipe shall provide a
trouble-free means of joint restraint for the pipe. These restraining systems shall
include gaskets provided by the pipe manufacturer that contain high-strength
stainless steel elements spaced around the gasket that develop a dependable
gripping action. These push-on restrained joint gaskets shall be rated for a
working pressure of 350 PSI for pipe sizes 4-inch through 24-inch and 150 psi
for 30-inch pipe.
2.9 WYES, SADDLES, AND SERVICES '
A. The materials described within this paragraph shall include all materials to
construct a complete sanitary sewer service connection from the gravity
sanitary sewer main to the edge of the permanent easement or right-of-way.
B. Wyes and saddles shall be of the same material and strength as the sewer
mains on which they are installed. Saddle type fittings shall not be used on new
construction or existing mains for pipes 12 inches in diameter or smaller, unless
specifically called for in the Plans and/or Specifications or approved in writing
by the Engineer. For ductile iron mains greater than 12 inches in diameter,
"CB" Romac tapping saddles as manufactured by Romac Industries, Inc. or an
approved equal may be used. Unless otherwise specified in the Plans and/or
Specifications, house services shall be constructed of 4-inch diameter Schedule
40 PVC pipe or Class 350 psi ductile iron pipe.
C. For taps and services on an existing PVC or VCP sewer mains that are being '
repaired by trenchless construction methods, flexible saddles as manufactured
by NDS/HPI or an approved equal may be utilized. Flexible saddles shall be
affixed to the sewer main by stainless steel bands or straps as provided by the
manufacturer and by using a two-part epoxy glue uniformly spread over the
contact surface of the saddle.
D. A compression coupling by Inserta-Tee or approved equal shall be used to re-
connect services to existing 8-inch and larger diameter sewer mains that are
being rehabilitated by trenchless construction methods. '
I
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 12

E. Wyes shall be placed in sanitary sewers so as to properly serve each existing
house and each vacant lot facing or butting on the street or alley in which the
sewer is being laid, and at such other locations as may be designated by the
Engineer.
F. The location of all wyes, cleanouts, and service lines installed in the work shall
be identified on the plans submitted by the Contractor at the end of the project.
2.10 TRANSITION COUPLINGS
A. New Sewer System Construction:
1. In general, transition couplings shall not be permitted in the construction of
new sewer systems. For new gravity sewer system construction, the
same pipe material shall extend between manholes with no transitions.
2. The pipe material associated with a sewer force main may change, when
and where indicated on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
When the nominal diameter of the pipe does not change, an approved
transition coupling may be used, as necessary, to joint these dissimilar
materials. In these cases, a ductile iron, mechanical joint, solid sleeve
shall be used to joint these dissimilar materials. The solid sleeve shall be
as specified above for fittings and shall be the long body-type. The
appropriate gaskets shall be selected based on the outside diameters of
the materials being jointed. All gaskets shall be as specified above. In all
cases, the gap between the pipe sections being jointed shall not exceed
0.25 inches.
3. Where the nominal diameter of a sewer force main changes, an
appropriate ductile iron, mechanical joint reducer, as specified above for
fittings, shall be used to joint these materials. The appropriate gaskets
shall be selected based on the outside diameters of the material being
jointed. All gaskets shall be as specified above.
B. Rehabilitation of Existing Sewer Systems:
1. In general, during the rehabilitation of existing sewer lines, the use of
appropriate transition couplings shall be permitted as approved by the
Engineer. All changes in pipe size within the gravity sewer collection
system shall require the installation of a manhole as specified elsewhere.
2. Jointing for gravity sewer lines shall require an appropriate shielded
rubber sewer coupling. In all cases, the gap between the pipe sections
being jointed shall not exceed 0.25 inches. The coupling shall consist of a
rubber sleeve conforming to ASTM C425 and ASTM C1173 with a Grade
316 stainless steel shear ring and clamps conforming to ASTM A240.
Clamps shall be included with nut and bolt or worm drive take-up
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 13

1
fasteners. "O" ring-type seals shall be provided under each sealing clamp
to prevent slippage and provide a positive seal. I
3. When the rehabilitation of a sanitary sewer force main requires the use of
a transition coupling, the use of such couplings shall be as approved by
the Engineer. When the nominal diameter of the pipe does not change,
an approved transition coupling may be used, as necessary. In these
cases, a ductile iron, mechanical joint, solid sleeve shall be used to joint
these materials. The solid sleeve shall be as specified above for fittings
and shall be the long body-type. The appropriate gaskets shall be
selected based on the outside diameter(s) of the material(s) being jointed.
All gaskets shall be as specified above. In all cases, the gap between the
pipe sections being jointed shall not exceed 0.25 inches.
4. Where the nominal diameter of a sewer force main changes as part of a ,
rehabilitation project, an appropriate ductile iron, mechanical joint reducer,
as specified above for fittings, shall be used to joint these materials. The
appropriate gaskets shall be selected based on the outside diameters of
the material being jointed. All gaskets shall be as specified above.
2.11 MANHOLES
A. Standard precast concrete manholes sections shall conform to the latest 1
revision of ASTM C 478. Tapered section and transition sections, where
required, shall be of eccentric cone design, having the same wall thickness and
reinforcement as the cylindrical ring sections. Flat slab tops shall be required I
for very shallow manholes where shown or specified. Flat slab tops shall ONLY
be utilized when/where approved for use by the Engineer. All manholes shall
be constructed to the sizes, shapes, and dimensions and at the locations shown
on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, manhole diameters, wall
thicknesses and bottom thicknesses shall be as follows:
Pipe Size Diameter Wall Bottom
(inches) (feet) Thickness Thickness
(inches) (inches)
8 through 18 4 5 6 111
21 through 36 5 5 8
39 through 54 6 6 8
Larger than 54 8 8 8
B. The minimum wall thickness of all manhole riser sections shall be as shown in
the table above. Cone sections shall have a minimum wall thickness of 8
inches at their top. Suitable openings for inlet and outlet pipes shall be cast into
1
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 14
1

the base section for standard connections and into the riser section for drop
connections. These openings shall be circular, accurately located and
appropriately sized for each manhole.
C. The height or depth of each manhole will vary with the location, but unless
otherwise indicated, it shall be constructed such that the top of the manhole
matches that of the finished grade surrounding the manhole and the invert is
constructed at elevation shown on the plans. As directed by the Engineer (or
as otherwise indicated on the plans) the top elevations of some manholes may
be elevated above the finished grade of the surrounding area in wooded or
other natural (unmaintained) areas. In all cases, the number of manhole
sections (joints) necessary to construct the required height shall be minimized.
D. All manhole and wet well bases shall be monolithically poured complete with a
bottom. When indicated on the drawings, precast concrete base sections shall
be provided with extended base sections or increased bottom thickness to
provide ballast to prevent flotation. Extended bases, as required by the
drawings, may be included in the monolithic pour of the base or integrally cast
as approved by the Engineer.
E. Minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be 4,000 psi at 28 days and
shall comply with ACI 318, and ACI 350. The maximum permissible absorption
shall be 6.0 percent. All cement used in the mixture shall be in accordance with
ASTM C 150, Type II. Fine aggregate shall be sand, while coarse aggregate
shall be crushed gravel, both in accordance with ASTM C 33. All water utilized
in the concrete mix shall be potable water. Bases and risers shall be reinforced
with a single cage of steel placed within the center third of the wall. Welded
wire fabric shall be in accordance with ASTM A 185. Steel reinforcing bars
shall be grade 60 deformed steel in accordance with ASTM A 615. The tongue
or the groove of the joint shall contain one (1) line of circumferential
reinforcement equal in area to that in the barrel of the manhole riser. The
minimum cross-sectional area of steel per linear foot shall be 0.12 square
inches. Precast manhole sections shall fit together readily.
F. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished manhole
sections shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer. The
manhole sections shall be perpendicular to their longitudinal axis within the
limits listed in ASTM C 478.
G. Joint Sealing Materials: Joints shall be sealed by two (2) butyl rubber seals.
Each seal shall be as described below:
1 . Butyl Seals shall consist of a plastic or paper-backed butyl rubber rope no
less than 1-inch cross section. When manholes are larger than 4 feet
diameter or have a larger than normal space between the joints, the length
and or diameter of the rope shall be increased as required to achieve a
seal. Butyl rubber material shall conform to Federal Specification SS-
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 15

li
S210A, AASHTO M-198, Type B - Butyl Rubber and as follows: maximum
of 1 percent volatile matter and suitable for application temperatures
between 10 and 100 degrees F. Butyl rubber shall be applied to clean,
dry surfaces only. Use of 2 independent wraps of Butyl Rubber placed
side-by-side (not stacked) qualifies for the requirement of two seals.
2. Internal 0-Ring Gaskets and Internal Rubber Gaskets shall not be used.
H. Manhole Sleeves and Entrance Joints: Flexible manhole sleeves or flexible
manhole entrance joints shall be installed on all pipes entering and leaving
precast manholes. Manhole openings shall be accurately core drilled or cast in
place. Sleeve and joint material shall be of high-quality synthetic rubber which
complies with the requirements of ASTM Specification C 923. Sleeve hardware
(clamps, bands, straps, draw bolts, nuts, etc.) shall be stainless steel and make
a watertight union. Sleeves shall be Kor-N-Seal I, Kor-N-Seal II, flexible
connectors models 72, 73, 74, 107, 117, 126, 127, 128, 1610, or 1612 as
manufactured by EPCO, or shall be as manufactured by Lock Joint a subsidiary
of Gifford-Hill-American, Inc. or comparable sleeves as manufactured by the
Press Seal Gasket Corporation, or equal. Flexible manhole entrance joints may
be cast into the wall of the manhole base or may be installed by coring the
manhole wall and installing the flexible connector to form a tight waterstop.
Joints shall be watertight under a 30-foot head of water. Flexible manhole
entrance joints shall be A-LOK Joints as manufactured by the A-LOK Products
Corp., Press Wedge II as manufactured by the Press Seal Gasket Corp., or
equal. Flexible manhole sleeves and flexible manhole entrance joints shall be
installed in accordance with instructions of their manufacturer.
I. Manhole Steps:
1. Steps shall be a copolymer polypropylene plastic reinforced with a 1/2 inch
diameter, grade 60 bar and have serrated tread and tall end lugs. Step
pull out strength shall be a minimum of 2,000 pounds when tested
according to ASTM C-497.
2. Steps shall be required in all structures with a depth greater than four (4) ■
feet. Steps shall be vertically aligned and uniformly spaced for the entire
depth of the structure. Steps shall be located in the structures along the
vertical face of the eccentric cone and so as to land upon a bench.
3. Steps shall be vertically spaced between 12 and 16 inches on center. '
Step width shall be a minimum of 12 inches. Steps shall protrude from the
wall of the structure a minimum of five (5) inches and a maximum of seven
(7) inches.
4. Secure steps to the wall with a compression fit in tapered holes. Steps
shall not be vibrated or driven into freshly cast concrete. Steps shall not
be grouted in place.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 16
1

J. Precast Grade Rings and Brick:
1. Precast reinforced concrete grade rings or brick shall be used to adjust
ring and covers to finished grade. No more than 12 vertical inches of
grade rings or brick will be allowed per manhole. Grade rings shall
conform to ASTM C478 and shall be no less than 6 inches and no more
than 9 inches in height with a diameter matching that of the frame and
cover.
2. All brick used shall be solid and shall be made from Concrete, Clay, or
Shale, and shall be of standard building size.
K. Manhole Frames and Covers:
1. Frames and covers shall be cast iron of superior quality, tough and even
texture. Castings shall be gray iron conforming to ASTM A 48, size as
indicated, free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage distortion,
or other defects, and well cleaned. The bearing surface between frame
and cover shall be machined to prevent rocking and rattling.
2. The standard manhole casting shall be designed for heavy duty use with a
190-pound frame and 125 pound cover. All frames and covers shall
comply with AASHTO HS20 loading requirements as well as North
Carolina DOT standard 840.54. The minimum opening within the interior
of the frame shall be 24-inches. The frame shall have a 4-inch minimum
width flange with the cover being 26 inches in diameter and shall include an
indented top design with lettering cast into the cover, using the wording
"SANITARY SEWER." Acceptable products include U.S. Foundry USF
669 ring and KL cover, or an approved equal.
3. Special waterproof manhole frame and covers shall be installed only at
those locations indicated on the contract drawings. Watertight rings and
lids shall be U.S. Foundry 669-KL-BWTL with a 125-pound cover. Ring
shall have a flat type gasket and cover shall be bolted down with a
minimum of four (4) bolts.
4. After the manhole has been set in its final position, set the manhole frame
to the required elevation using no more than 12 inches of precast concrete
grade rings, or bricks sealing all joints between cone, adjusting rings, and
manhole frame. When grade rings or bricks are used, grout with non-
shrink grout. Where manholes are constructed in paved areas, the top
surface of the frame and cover shall be tilted so as to conform to the exact
slope, crown, and grade of the existing surrounding pavement. Manhole
frames which are placed above final grade will have frames attached to
manhole cone section by means of 5/8-inch diameter stainless steel
anchors and washers. One anchor bolt shall be provided per hole.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 17

5. When flat slab tops are utilized, frames shall be cast into the top for
access into manholes.
L. Manhole Inverts and Benches:
1. All sanitary sewer manholes (excluding wet well structures) shall include
inverts and benches. Manhole inverts and benches shall be constructed
of brick and cement grout or precast concrete in accordance with the
standard details shown on the drawings. Inverts shall have a "U" shaped
cross section of the same diameter as the invert of the sewers which they
connect. "U" shaped inverts shall be constructed to a minimum depth of 6
inches for 8-inch sewers and to full pipe diameter depth of the outlet sewer
main for larger mains. The manhole invert shall be carefully formed to the
required size and grade by gradual and even changes in sections.
Changes in direction of flow through the manhole, whether horizontal or
vertical, shall be made with true tangent curve(s) with as large a radius as
the size of the manhole will permit. Provide a 1/2 inch radius at the
intersection of 2 or more channels. The minimum concrete thickness in
the invert of the channel shall be 2 inches, not including the manhole base
thickness. The fall across the manhole invert shall be as noted on the
plans.
2. Manhole benches shall be constructed with a slope of 1 inch per foot (8
percent) sloped toward the invert channel. Finish benches shall provide a
uniform slope from the high point at the manhole wall to the low point at
invert channel. Provide a radius (1/8 inch to 1 inch range is acceptable) at
the edge of the bench and channel.
3. When the invert and bench are not constructed by the precast
manufacturer, the Contractor shall construct the invert and bench using
3,000 psi concrete or non-shrink grout. Non-shrink grout may be
plastered over layered brick and mortar in lieu of solid non-shrink grout
invert.
4. Gradual smooth sided depressions and high spots may be allowed so long
as diameter of invert channel ranges from 1/4 inch less than, or 1/2 inch
more than the nominal pipe diameter are maintained. Voids, chips, or
fractures over 1/8 inch in diameter or depth shall be filled with a non-shrink
grout and finished to a texture reasonably consistent with the bench
surface. All work from collar down shall have a steel trowel finish.
5. Pipe Openings: Pipe openings shall provide clearance for pipe projecting
a minimum of 2 inches inside the manhole. The crown of smaller diameter
pipes shall be no lower than the crown of the outlet pipe. Grout pipe
penetrations, including pipe crown, to provide a smooth, uniform finish
using non-shrink grout.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 18

M. Manhole Drops: Standard drop manholes will be constructed only at those
locations shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. The design
of the drop connection shall be in accordance with the standard detail drawing.
The cost of the extra pipe, labor, etc. required to construct a drop manhole will
be included in the unit price for the drop manhole at the depths indicated.
N. Manhole Vents:
1. Where designated on the contract drawings, a 4-inch diameter vent pipe
shall be installed as an integral part of the manhole. The vent pipe is to be
tapped into the upper most section of the manhole, anchored in concrete
and extended vertically to the elevation shown on the drawings. The pipe
shall have a reverse bend and screen to prohibit rain and foreign materials
from entering pipe.
2. The pipe material shall be Schedule 40 Steel with a coal tar interior lining
in accordance with AWWA C203 and have an exterior finish consisting of
two (2) coats of epoxy paint as approved by the Engineer.
2.12 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Swing check valves smaller than 3 inches in diameter shall be single disc with
renewable bronze seat rings, bronze discs or disc rings and bronze disc hinges
and pins and shall be designed to give a full diameter passage.
B. Swing check valves 3 inches in diameter and larger shall be constructed with
heavy cast-iron or cast-steel body with a bronze or stainless-steel seat ring and
a non-corrosive shaft for attachment of weight and lever. The valves shall
absolutely prevent the return of water back through the valve when the inlet
pressure decreases below the outlet pressure. The valve disc shall be of
cast-iron or cast-steel and shall be suspended from a non-corrosive shaft.
2.13 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug valves shall be solid one piece, cast of ASTM A536 ductile iron. The plug
shall have a cylindrical seating surface eccentrically offset from the center of the
shaft. Plug shall not contact the seat prior to 90 percent closed. Plug facing
shall be Chloroprene (CR), or other resilient facing suitable for the application.
B. Bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Port shall be rectangular. Port
area shall be 100 percent of Standard class pipe area. Bearings shall be sleeve
type and made of sintered, oil-impregnated permanently lubricated type 316
stainless steel per ASTM A743 Grade CF8M.
C. Seats shall be 1/8-inch-thick welded overlay of not less than 95 percent pure
nickel. Seat shall be at least 1/2-inch wide and raised. The raised surface shall
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 19

be completely covered with nickel to ensure that the resilient plug face contacts
only the nickel seat.
D. Adjustable Packing shall be of the multiple V-ring type, with a packing gland
follower. Shaft seals shall permit inspection, adjustment, or complete
replacement of packing without disturbing any part of the valve or actuator
assembly except the packing gland follower.
E. Grit Excluders made of PTFE shall be provided to prevent the entry of grit and
solids into the bearing areas.
F. Pressure ratings shall be bi-directional and 175 psi on sizes 3-inch through 12-
inch diameters and 150 psi for 14-inch through 36-inch diameters. Every valve
shall be given a certified hydrostatic and seat test, with test reports being
available upon request.
G. Worm gear actuators shall be provided on all valves six inches and larger.
Actuators shall be enclosed in a cast iron housing, with outboard seals to
protect the bearings and other internal components. The actuator shaft and
gear quadrant shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings.
H. Buried actuators shall be 90 percent grease filled. Input shaft and fasteners
shall be stainless steel. Actuator mounting brackets shall be totally enclosed.
I. Eccentric plug valves and actuators shall meet or exceed the latest revisions of
AWWA C517 and other applicable standards. Flanged ends shall be per ANSI
B16.1 and mechanical joint ends per AWWA C111.
2.14 BUTTERFLY VALVES (For Use In Reclaimed Water Systems Only)
A. Valve shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with AWWA
C504, latest revision, and include the following design features. Valve shall be
rated and tested for absolute, zero leakage shut-off.
B. Valve body shall be cast iron per ASTM A 126 Class B or ductile iron per ASTM
A536 Grade 65-45-12. Flanged end valves shall be faced and drilled per ANSI
B16.1, Class 125, or as specified by purchaser. Mechanical joint ends shall be
per ANSI A21.11 and include mechanical joint end accessories. Valve body
shall include a stainless-steel seat ring that is mechanically retained without use
of clamping devices, adjusting segments, or other hardware being in the
waterway.
C. Valve disc shall be solid type ductile iron without any external vanes, ribs, etc.,
to obstruct flow. Resilient seat shall be located on edge of disc, offset from the
shaft, and seal against mating stainless steel body seat with 36 degree
uninterrupted contact. The resilient seal shall be locked to the disc by three
separate means of retention, and be field-adjustable, if necessary, with no tools
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 20

other than a standard socket wrench. Replacement of seat in field shall be
possible without valve disassembly. The disc shall be connected to the offset
stainless-steel shaft by locked taper wedge keys and stainless-steel retaining
nuts on the back side of the disc. Taper keys shall be heat treated 416
Stainless Steel for added strength. Shaft shall be stub type for valves 30inches
and larger in diameter; one piece for valves 24 inches in diameter and smaller.
The valve shall be equipped with adjustable thruster for centering the disc on
valves 30 inches and larger in diameter, if required.
D. Shaft shall have nylon sleeve or woven Teflon fiberglass-backed sleeve for
bearing surfaces. Bearings shall be self lubricating.
E. Valve body shall be primed with manufacturer's standard primer.
2.15 VALVE BOXES
A. All valve boxes shall be cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A48 and AWWA
M44. Valve boxes shall be of the adjustable screw type (based on depth of
burial) with a base to fit the valve yoke with a removable cover with the word
"SEWER" cast thereon.
2.16 SEWAGE AIRNACUUM RELEASE VALVES
A. Acceptable Products:
1. The air/vacuum release valve shall be designed specifically for use on
sanitary sewer pressure (force) mains. It shall exhaust large volumes of
air that may be present in a system during filling of the main or on pump
start-up. It shall also allow air to re-enter when the system is drained
intentionally or due to a break in the main (prevents vacuum from
forming).
2. Three inch and smaller combination air valves with operating pressures of
150 psi or less shall be of the integral type with a valve assembly which
functions as both an air and vacuum valve and an air release valve. The
valves shall be DeZurik Apco/Hilton "Series 400", GA Industries
"Figure 942", Crispin "Type SA", Val-Matic "Models 801A/802A/803A" or
ARI "D-020".
3. Four inch and larger combination air valves shall consist of an air and
vacuum valve with an externally mounted air release valve. The valves
shall be DeZurik Apco/Hilton "Series 400C", GA Industries "Figure 950
Kinetic Custom Combination Air Valves", Crispin "Type SL", or Val-Matic
"Model No. 48A/49A".
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 21

B. Materials:
1. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials of construction shall
comply with the standards of the authorities having jurisdiction. The use
of stressed thermoplastic components will not be acceptable.
a. Valve Trim: Bronze or austenitic stainless steel.
b. Float: Austenitic stainless steel.
c. Seats: Buna-N
C. Shop Coating and Painting:
1. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces, except stainless steel
components, shall be shop painted for corrosion protection. The valve
manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable. Field painting is
covered in the protective coatings section.
D. Shutoff Valves:
1. A shutoff valve shall be provided in the piping leading to each air release
valve and combination air valve. Each 4-inch and larger combination air
valve shall be provided with a shutoff valve between the air and vacuum
valve and the air release valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 BYPASS PUMPING
A. Under this item the Contractor is required to furnish all materials, labor,
equipment, power, maintenance, etc. to implement a temporary pumping
system for the purpose of diverting the existing flow around the work area for
the duration of the project.
B. Field Quality Control and Maintenance:
1 . Testing:
a. The Contractor shall perform leakage and pressure tests on the new
bypass pumping discharge piping using clean water prior to actual
operation. The Owner and Engineer shall be given 24-hours' notice
prior to testing.
b. The bypass pumping system shall be tested and operated
successfully for 24 continuous hours, and the wet well shall be
emptied, prior to start of work.
2. Inspection:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 22

a. The Contractor shall monitor the bypass pumping operation at all
times to ensure that the system is working correctly.
3. Maintenance Service:
a. The Contractor shall ensure that the temporary pumping system is
properly maintained, and a responsible operator shall be on-site
when pumps are operating.
b. A factory-trained service technician shall be located within at least
120 miles from the project site with a full complement of in-stock
spare parts for pumps and piping.
4. Extra Materials:
a. Spare parts for pumps and piping shall be kept on site as required.
b. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessories shall
be maintained on the site.
C. Preparation:
1. Precautions:
a. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for bypass pumping
during the time when the main is shut down for any reason. System
must overcome any existing force main pressure on discharge.
b. Contractor is responsible for locating any existing utilities in the area
the Contractor selects to locate the bypass pipelines. The
Contractor shall locate the bypass pipelines to minimize any
disturbance to existing utilities and shall obtain approval of the
pipeline locations from the Owner. All costs associated with
relocating utilities and obtaining all approvals shall be paid by the
Contractor.
c. During all bypass pumping operation, the Contractor shall
protect the Owner's pump station and/or sewer mains and all local
sewer lines from damage inflicted by any equipment. The Contractor
shall be responsible for all physical damage to the pumping station
and main and all sewer lines caused by human or mechanical failure.
D. Performance Requirements:
1. The design, installation and operation of the temporary pumping system
shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The bypass system shall meet the
requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
2. The Contractor shall provide all necessary means to safely convey the
incoming sewage past the work area. The Contractor will not be permitted
to stop or impede the flows in existing force mains.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 23

3. The Contractor shall maintain sewer flow around the work area in a
manner that will not cause surcharging of sewers, damage to sewers and
that will protect public and private property from damage and flooding. Any
sanitary sewer overflow that occurs due to a failure in the bypass system
will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any penalties issued by
authorities having jurisdiction will be reimbursed to the Owner by the
Contractor.
4. The Contractor shall protect water resources, wetlands, and other natural
resources. No sewage or water from the bypass pumping operation shall
be spilled on the ground or allowed to drain to storm drains. When
disassembling bypass pumping pipe, the Contractor shall ensure that any
sewage remaining in the pipe is drained back to the sewer collection
system. All spills shall be reported to the Owner, contained, and cleaned
up immediately by the Contractor.
E. Installation and Removal:
1. The Contractor shall remove manhole sections or make connections to the
existing sewer and construct temporary bypass pumping structures only at
the access location indicated on the Drawings and as may be required to
provide adequate suction conduit.
2. Plugging or blocking of sewage flows shall incorporate primary and
secondary plugging device. When plugging or blocking is no longer
needed for performance and acceptance or work, it is to be removed in a
manner that permits the sewage flow to slowly return to normal without
surge, to prevent surcharging or causing other major disturbances
downstream.
3. When working inside manholes or sewer lines, the Contractor shall comply
with OSHA requirements when working in the presence of sewer gases,
combustible oxygen-deficient atmospheres, and confined spaces.
4. The installation of the bypass pipelines is prohibited in all
saltmarsh/wetland areas. The bypass pipeline must be located off streets
and sidewalks and on shoulders of the roads. When the bypass
pipeline crosses local streets and private driveways, the contractor
must place the bypass pipelines in trenches and cover with
temporary pavement. Upon completion of the bypass pumping
operations, and after the receipt of written permission from the Owner, the
Contractor shall remove all the piping, restore all property to pre-
construction condition and restore all pavement. The Contractor is
responsible for obtaining any approvals for placement of the temporary
pipeline within public ways from authorities having jurisdiction.
1
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 24

5. If, at any time during construction, effluent from the existing sewer is not
fully contained by the bypass system, gravity service will be restored by a
temporary tie to the new construction and work will be suspended until the
problem is resolved to the satisfaction of the Engineer
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, backfilling and compaction requirements are specified in
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.3 PIPING AND VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to
the following applications:
1. Do not use flanged pipe, fittings or valves or unions for underground
(buried) piping. Fittings and valves for underground (buried) piping shall
be mechanical joint.
2. Flanged pipe, fittings and valves and unions shall be used on
aboveground piping and piping in vaults.
3. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least
equal to piping pressure rating may be used as specified, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Existing Utilities and Separation Requirements:
111 1. The Contractor shall be required to excavate to determine the precise
location of utilities or other underground obstructions which are shown on
the Plans and/or marked by the utility owners. Such location and
excavation shall be at least 500 feet ahead of construction, unless
otherwise noted. This work shall be done at no additional cost to the
Owner.
2. All utility owners shall be notified prior to excavation as required by the
1985 Underground Damage Prevention Act. Utility owners who are
members of NC OneCall may be notified by calling 811 (toll free) before
any excavation or drilling. The Contractor will be fully responsible for
damage to any utilities if the owners have not been properly notified as
required by the Underground Damage Prevention Act. All damage to such
structures and pipelines and all damage to property or persons resulting
from damage to such structures and pipelines shall be borne by the
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 25

I
Contractor and shall be completely repaired within a reasonable time. No
claim shall be made against the Owner for damage or delay of the work on
account of the proximity of, or the leakage from, such structures and
pipelines. Where high pressure gas lines are to be crossed, they shall be
uncovered by hand excavation methods before other excavation near
them is started. ■
3. Utility owners may, at their option, have representatives present to
supervise excavation in the vicinity of their utilities. The cost of such
supervision, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor.
4. Conflicts with underground utilities may necessitate changes in alignment
and/or grade of this construction. All such changes will be approved by
the Engineer before construction proceeds. 1
5. When underground obstructions not shown on the Plans are encountered,
the Contractor shall promptly report the conflict to the Engineer and shall
not proceed with construction until the conflict is resolved.
6. When a sewer main or lateral crosses an existing water main or other
utility, the Contractor shall make the installation in accordance with the
minimum specifications of the Controlling Agency and in accordance with
the following minimum requirements. When a sewer main or lateral
crosses or parallels an existing utility, the following clearance
requirements are to be met or ferrous sewer pipe with water tight joints
shall be used for a distance of 10 feet outside said point of crossing or
until horizontal separation requirements are achieved.
a. Min. Vertical Separation for Sewer Crossings:
1) Storm Sewers - 24" Vertical
2) Under Water - 18" Vertical
3) Over Water - 18" Vertical * Sewer over water requires that
both pipes shall be ferrous pipe with a 20-foot jointless span
centered at crossing. *
4) Cable - 24" Vertical
5) Power- 24" Vertical
6) Gas - 24" Vertical
b. Horizontal Separations:
1) Storm Sewers - 5'
2) Water Mains - 10'
3) Water Supply - 100' (WS-I Waters, Class I or Class II
impounded reservoirs)
4) Water Supply - 50' (WS-II, WS-III, B, SA, ORW, HOW or SB
Waters —from Normal High Water)
5) Designated Trout Streams - 25'
6) Other Stream, Lake or Impoundment - 10'
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 26

7) Building Foundation - 5'
8) Basement - 10'
9) Ground Water Lowering and Surface Drainage Ditch 10'
10) Swimming Pool - 10'
11) Private Wells - 25'
12) Public Wells - 50'
B. Conventional Pipe Laying:
Y :9
1. The layout of gravity sanitary sewer lines and invert elevations at
governing points shall be as shown on the drawings.
2. The Contractor shall do all layout work for lines and grades from that
information shown on the drawings or as furnished by the Engineer.
a. When a laser beam instrument is used to set line and grade, the unit
must be maintained in good working order, and the calibration
checked daily for both alignment and percent grade. In the event the
required accuracy of alignment and grade is not adhered to, the
Engineer will prohibit the use of laser beams.
b. Install piping beginning at low point, true to the grades and alignment
indicated with unbroken continuity. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends
facing in the direction of pipe laying, unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. In all cases, pipe is to be installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract material
specifications. The Engineer may augment any manufacturer's
installation recommendations if, in his opinion, it will best serve the
interest of the Owner.
c. Proper tools, implements, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer
shall be provided and used for the safe and convenient prosecution
of pipe laying. All pipe and other materials used in the laying of pipe
will be lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of suitable
equipment in such a manner to prevent damage to the pipe,
materials, to the protective coating on the pipe materials, and to
provide a safe working condition to all personnel in the trench. Each
piece of pipe being lowered into the trench shall be clean, sound,
and free from defects. It shall be laid on the prepared foundation, as
specified elsewhere to produce a straight line on a uniform grade,
each pipe being laid so as to form a smooth and straight inside flow
line. Pipe shall be removed at any time if broken, injured, or
displaced in the process of laying same, or of backfilling the trench.
d. When cutting short lengths of pipe, a pipe cutter, as approved by the
Engineer, will be used and care will be taken to make the cut at right
angles to the centerline of the pipe or on the exact skew as shown
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 27

1
1
on the plans. In the case of push-on pipe, the cut ends shall be
tapered with a portable grinder, or coarse file to match the '
manufactured taper.
e. Place a plug in the end of incomplete piping at end of day and when
work stops. No trench water or other material shall be permitted to
enter the pipe. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and
superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in
piping and pull past each joint as it is completed.
f. Where the pipe is laid on a grade of 20 percent or greater, the laying
shall start at the bottom of the slope and proceed upward with the
bell end of the new pipe upgrade. All pipe laid on a grade of 20
percent or greater shall require thrust blocking or keying as shown
on the drawings and standard details.
g. Install ductile iron, gravity sewer piping in accordance with ASTM A
746.
h. Install PVC gravity sewer piping in accordance with ASTM D 2321
and ASTM F 1668.
i. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping in accordance with ASTM C
1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
j. All sanitary sewer force main piping shall be installed with 36-inch
minimum cover over the top of the pipe.
k. Install ductile iron force main piping in accordance with AWWA C600
or AWWA M41. '
I. Install PVC force main piping in accordance with AWWA M23 or
ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668.
m. Install detectable warning tape over all nonferrous piping.
C. Exposed Piping:
1. All exposed piping to be installed inside wetwells, vaults and buildings
shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and field painted as described I
below. All exposed pipe shall be ductile iron utilizing flanged joints unless
otherwise noted.
2. All exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings and valves shall be field painted with 1
two (2) coats of epoxy paint as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Color of paint shall be as selected by the Owner. I
D. Horizontal Directional Drilling of HDPE Force Mains:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 28
I

1. The Contractor may install HDPE force mains by means of horizontal
directional drilling. The Contractor shall assemble, support, and pretest
the pipeline prior to installation in the directional drill tunnel.
2. Horizontal directional drilling shall consist of the drilling of a small diameter
pilot hole from one end of the alignment to the other, followed by enlarging
the hole diameter for the pipeline insertion. The exact method and
techniques for completing the directionally drilled installation will be
determined by the Contractor, subject to the requirements of these
specifications.
3. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a plan to the Engineer describing
the insertion of the HDPE pipe into the opened bore hole. The plan shall
include pullback procedure, ballasting, use of rollers, side booms and side
rollers, coating protection, internal cleaning, internal gauging, hydrostatic
tests, dewatering, and purging.
4. The required piping shall be assembled in a manner that does not obstruct
adjacent roadways or public activities. The Contractor shall erect
temporary fencing around the entry and exit pipe staging areas.
5. Each length of pipe shall be inspected and cleaned as necessary to be
free of debris immediately prior to joining.
6. Pipes shall be joined to one another be means of thermal butt-fusion.
Polyethylene pipe lengths to be joined by thermal butt-fusion shall be of
the same type, grade, and class of polyethylene compound and supplied
from the same raw material supplier.
I 7. Mechanical connections of the polyethylene pipe to auxiliary equipment
shall be through flanged connections which shall consist of the following:
a. A polyethylene "sub end" shall be thermally butt-fused to the ends of
the pipe.
b. Provide ASTM A240, Type 304 stainless steel backing flange, 125-
pound, ANSI B16.1 standard, and gaskets as required by the
manufacturer.
c. Stainless steel bolts and nuts of sufficient length to show a minimum
f of three complete threads when the joint is made and tightened to
the manufacturer's standard. Retorque the nuts after 4 hours.
d. Butt-fusion of pipes shall be performed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation as to equipment and technique.
Butt-fusion jointing shall be 100% efficient offering a joint weld
I strength equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 29

I
II
8. Pipe installed by the directional drilled method must be located in plan as
shown on the drawings and must be no shallower than shown on the I
drawings unless otherwise approved. The Contractor shall plot the actual
horizontal and vertical alignment of the pilot bore at intervals not
exceeding 30 feet. The "as built" plan and profile shall be updated as the
pilot bore is advanced. The Contractor shall at all times provide and
maintain instrumentation that will accurately locate the pilot hole and
measure drilling fluid flow and pressure. The Contractor shall grant the
Engineer access to all data and readout pertaining to the position of the
bore head and the fluid pressure and flows.
9. When requested, the Contractor shall provide explanations of this position II
monitoring and steering equipment. The Contractor shall employ
experienced personnel to operate the directional drilling equipment and, in
particular, the position monitoring and steering equipment. No information
pertaining to the position or inclination of the pilot hole bores shall be
withheld from the Engineer. iI
10. Each exit point shall be located as shown with an over-length tolerance of
10 feet for directional drills of 1 ,000 linear feet or less and 40 feet for
directional drills of greater than 1,000 linear feet and an alignment
tolerance of 5 feet left/right with due consideration of the position of the
other exit points and the required permanent easement. The alignment of
each pilot bore must be approved by the Engineer before pipe can be
pulled. If the pilot bore fails to conform to the above tolerances, the
Engineer may, at his option, require a new pilot boring to be made.
11. After the pipe is in place, cleaning pigs shall be used to remove residual
water and debris. After the cleaning operation, the Contractor shall
provide and run a sizing pig to check for anomalies in the form of buckles, 1
dents, excessive out-of-roundness, and any other deformations. The
sizing pig run shall be considered acceptable if the survey results indicate
that there are no sharp anomalies (e.g. dents, buckles, gouges, and 8
internal obstructions) greater than 2 percent of the nominal pipe diameter,
or excessive ovality greater than 5 percent of the nominal pipe diameter.
For gauging purposes, dent locations are those defined above which I�
occur within a span of 5 feet or less. Pipe ovality shall be measured as
the percent difference between the maximum and minimum pipe
diameters. For gauging purposes, ovality locations are those defined
above which exceed a span of 5 feet.
12. Reaming: Reaming operations shall be conducted to enlarge the pilot
bore after acceptance of the pilot bore. The number and size of such
reaming operations shall be conducted at the discretion of the Contractor.
13. Pulling Loads: The maximum allowable pull exerted on the HDPE 0
pipelines shall be measured continuously and limited to the maximum
II
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 30
I

I
allowed by the pipe manufacturer so that the pipe or joints are not over
stressed.
14. Torsion and Stresses: A swivel shall be used to connect the pipeline to
ithe drill pipe to prevent torsional stresses from occurring in the pipe.
15. The lead end of the pipe shall be closed during the pullback operation.
16. Pipeline Support: The pipelines shall be adequately supported by rollers
and side booms and monitored during installation so as to prevent over
I
stressing or buckling during pullback operation. Such support/rollers shall
be spaced at a maximum of 60 feet on centers, and the rollers to be
comprised of a non-abrasive material arranged in a manner to provide
I support to the bottom and bottom quarter points of the pipeline allowing for
free movement of the pipeline during pullback. Surface damage shall be
repaired by the Contractor before pulling operations resume.
I
17. The Contractor shall at all times handle the HDPE pipe in a manner that
does not over stress the pipe. Vertical and horizontal curves shall be
limited so that wall stresses do not exceed 50 percent of yield stress for
flexural bending of the HDPE pipe. If the pipe is buckled or otherwise
damaged, the damaged section shall be removed and replaced by the
Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall take appropriate steps
during pullback to ensure that the HDPE pipe will be installed without
damage.
I 18. During drilling, reaming, or pullback operations, the Contractor shall make
adequate provisions for handling the drilling fluids, or cuttings at the entry
and exit pits. To the greatest extent practical, these fluids must not be
111 discharged into the waterway. When the Contractor's provisions for
storage of the fluids or cuttings on site are exceeded, these materials shall
be hauled away to a suitable legal disposal site. The Contractor shall
I conduct his directional drilling operation in such a manner that drilling
fluids are not forced through the subbottom into the waterway. After
completion of the directional drilling work, the entry and exit pit locations
shall be restored to original conditions. The Contractor shall comply with
all permit provisions.
19. Pits constructed at the entry or exit point area shall be so constructed to
completely contain the drill fluid and prevent its escape to the beach or
waterway.
20. The Contractor shall utilize drilling tools and procedures which will
minimize the discharge of any drill fluids. The Contractor shall comply
with all mitigation measures listed in the required permits and elsewhere in
these specifications.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 31

m
21. To the extent practical, the Contractor shall maintain a closed loop drilling
fluid system.
22. The Contractor shall minimize drilling fluid disposal quantities by utilizing a
drilling fluid cleaning system which allows the returned fluids to be reused.
23. As part of the installation plan specified herein before, the Contractor shall
submit a drilling fluid plan which details types of drilling fluids, cleaning
and recycling equipment, estimated flow rates, and procedures for
minimizing drilling fluid escape.
24. All drilling operations shall be performed by supervisors and personnel if
experienced in horizontal directional drilling. All required support,
including drilling tool suppliers, survey systems, mud cleaning, mud
disposal, and other required support systems used during this operation
shall be provided by the Contractor.
25. A smoothly drilled pilot hole shall follow the design of the pipe profile and if
alignment described on the construction drawings.
26. The position of the drill string shall be monitored by the Contractor with the
downhole survey instruments. Contractor shall compute the position in
the X, Y, and Z axis relative to ground surface from downhole survey data
a minimum of once per length of each drilling pipe (approximately 31-foot
interval). Deviations from the acceptable tolerances described in the
specifications shall be documented and immediately brought to the
attention of the Engineer for discussion and/or approval. The profile and
alignment defined on the construction drawings for the bore holes define
the minimum depth and radius of curvature. The Contractor shall maintain
and provide to the Engineer, upon request, the data generated by the
downhole survey tools in a form suitable for independent calculation of the
pilot hole profile.
27. Between the water's edge and the entry or exit point the Contractor shall
provide and use a separate steering system employing a ground survey
grid system, such as "TRU-TRACKER" or equal wherever possible. The
exit point shall fall within a rectangle 10 wide and 40 feet long centered on
the planned exit point.
28. During the entire operation, waste and leftover drilling fluids from the pits
and cuttings shall be dewatered and disposed of in accordance with all
permits and regulatory agencies requirements. Remaining water shall be
cleaned by Contractor to meet permit requirements.
29. Technical criteria for bentonite shall be as given in API Spec. 13A,
Specification for Oil Well Drilling Fluids Material for freshwater drilling
fluids. Any modification to the basic drilling fluid involving additives must
describe the type of material to be used and be included on Contractor's
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 32

I
drilling plan presented to the Engineer. The Owner retains the right to
sample and monitor the waste drilling mud, cuttings, and water.
30. The horizontal directional drilling operation is to be operated in a manner
I
to eliminate the discharge of water, drilling mud and cuttings to the
adjacent creek or land areas involved during the construction process.
The Contractor shall provide equipment and procedures to maximize the
I
recirculation or reuse of drilling mud to minimize waste. All excavated pits
used in the drilling operation shall be lined by Contractor with heavy-duty
plastic sheeting with sealed joints to prevent the migration of drilling fluids
and/or ground water.
31. The Contractor shall visit the site and must be aware of all structures and
I site limitations at the directional drill crossing and provide the Engineer
with a drilling plan outlining procedures to prevent drilling fluid from
adversely affecting the surrounding area.
32. The general work areas on the entry and exit sides of the crossing shall be
enclosed by a berm to contain unplanned spills or discharge.
33. Waste cuttings and drilling mud shall be processed through a solids
control plant comprised as a minimum of sumps, pumps, tanks,
desalter/desander, centrifuges, material handlers, and haulers all in a
I quantity sufficient to perform the cleaning/separating operation without
interference with the drilling program. The cuttings and excess drilling
fluids shall be dewatered by the Contractor to the extent necessary for
I disposal in offsite landfills. Water from the dewatering process shall be
treated by the Contractor to meet permit requirements and disposed of
legally. The cuttings and water for disposal are subject to being sampled
I and tested. The construction site and adjacent areas will be checked
frequently for signs of unplanned leaks or seeps.
34. Equipment (graders, shovels, etc.) and materials (such as groundsheets,
hay bales, booms, and absorbent pads) for cleanup and contingencies
shall be provided in sufficient quantities by the Contractor and maintained
I
at all sites for use in the event of inadvertent leaks, seeps, or spills.
35. Waste drilling mud and cuttings shall be dewatered, dried, and stockpiled
such that it can be loaded by a front end loader, transferred to a truck and
hauled offsite to a suitable legal disposal site. The maximum allowed
water content of these solids is 50 percent of weight.
36. Due to a limited storage space at the worksites, dewatering and disposal
work shall be concurrent with drilling operations. Treatment of water shall
satisfy regulatory agencies before it is discharged.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 33
I

3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. Sanitary sewer manholes shall be installed at each change in line or grade in
each gravity sanitary sewer line as shown on the contract drawings.
B. The manhole foundation shall be prepared so as to provide a firm, level area on
which to place the precast concrete manhole base section. When poor
foundation soil is encountered or excess groundwater exists, the foundation
shall be excavated 12 inches or greater below the final subgrade elevation, as
determined by the Engineer and backfilled with washed stone to provide a
proper foundation.
C. The manhole sections shall be lifted from the side of the excavation to the
bottom of the trench with equipment and support slings capable of safely
handling the heavy concrete pieces without damaging them. The manhole shall
be set plumb and adjusted to the final finished surface grade with brick or grade
rings and non-shrink grout.
D. Thoroughly clean the bells and spigots of each manhole section to remove dirt
and other foreign materials that may prevent sealing. Unroll the butyl sealant
directly against the base of the spigot. Leave protective wrapper attached until
sealant is entirely unrolled against spigot. Do not stretch. Overlap from side to
side - not top to bottom.
E. Pipe openings shall be exactly aligned to that of the pipe entering and leaving
the manhole. The gravity sanitary sewer pipe lines shall be placed in the
manhole openings, properly aligned, and set to grade. Sanitary sewer shall be
connected to the manholes using flexible manhole sleeves as described above.
F. For large diameter pipe where a flexible rubber sleeve is not available, the pipe
line shall be sealed into the manhole using an expanding type or non-shrink
type grout.
G. For manhole steps, refer to the precast manhole section above.
H. After the manhole has been set in its final position, set the manhole frames to
the required elevation using no more than 12 inches of precast concrete grade
rings, or bricks sealing all joints between cone, adjusting rings, and manhole
frame. When grade rings or bricks are used, grout with non-shrink grout.
Where manholes are constructed in paved areas, the top surface of the frame
and cover shall be tilted so as to conform to the exact slope, crown, and grade
of the existing surrounding pavement. Manhole frames which are placed above
final grade will have frames attached to manhole cone section by means of 5/8-
inch diameter stainless steel anchors and washers. One anchor bolt shall be
provided per hole. Seal pipe penetrations, including pipe crown, to provide a
smooth, uniform finish using non-shrink grout.
1
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 34

I. After the placement of manhole frame and vacuum testing, perform the final
finishing to the manhole interior by filling all chips or fractures greater than 1/2
inch in length, width, or depth (1/8 inch deep in inverts) with non-shrink grout.
Grout the interior joints between the precast concrete sections with non-shrink
grout. Sharp edges or rough finishes shall be removed providing a smooth
surface throughout the manhole. Clean the interior of the manhole, removing
all dirt, spills, or other foreign matter.
3.6 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS
A. Connections to existing collection systems will be allowed when proper
precautions are taken to protect the existing collection system.
B. If the proposed sewer does not begin at an existing manhole, a new manhole
will be "cut in" at the required location and the existing pipe(s) repaired as
specified. For extensions of the existing system, the new "cut in" manhole or
the connection to the existing manhole will not be constructed until all other
sewer construction has been completed and tested in compliance with these
specifications.
C. Pipelines or manholes which contain silt, sedimentation, or other foreign
material shall not be connected to any portion of the existing collection system.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, flush, or otherwise cause the line
(and manholes) to be cleaned out without any discharge into the existing
system.
D. Any connection with 18-inch and smaller pipe at an existing precast or cast-in
place manhole will require the Contractor to core the necessary opening
through the manhole wall and install a flexible manhole sleeve. Sleeve shall be
as specified elsewhere. Connections to existing brick manholes do not require
coring and an opening may be carefully hammered or sawed. Connections to
existing manholes for pipe larger than 18 inches in diameter may be cored or
sawed as approved by the Engineer.
E. The existing manhole bench and invert shall be constructed and/or repaired in
compliance with these specifications.
3.7 INSTALLING NEW SEWER SERVICE LINES
A. For extensions of the existing sewer system, all buildable lots adjacent to the
extension shall have a sewer service line provided. Additional service lines
may be installed by the Contractor as directed and authorized by the Engineer.
B. In general, service lines shall be constructed from the public sewer to a point
located at the edge of the public right-of-way or the sewer easement. Service
lines shall consist of a 4-inch or 6-inch diameter pipe, as listed in the Bid
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 35

1
I
Schedule and/or shown on the Plans. Install a cleanout at the end of the
service line at the public right-of-way. 1
C. Service lines built for vacant lots/future connections shall have a cleanout
assembly constructed, which includes a 1-foot capped stub-out on the service
line. The vertical cleanout pipe shall also be capped and shall be a minimum of
3 feet above the finished grade.
D. The standard sewer service connection shall be 4 inches in diameter unless 1
shown otherwise on the drawings, and shall connect to the main at a wye
branch connection installed with the pipe line as it is being laid. Service lines 4
inches or less shall not be made into a manhole. Service connections 6 inches
or greater shall only be made into an existing or proposed manhole, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. 1
E. The Owner maintained portion of each sewer service line shall have a minimum
of 3 feet of cover, unless approved by the Engineer. 1
F. Sewer service lines and clean-outs shall be Class 350 DIP (with Class 350
appurtenances) if:
1. The service line installed will have less than 3 feet of cover; or
2. The service line crosses a creek or drainage ditch (whether aerial or
subaqueous).
G. The minimum slope on any residential sewer service line shall not be less than
2 percent.
H. At the edge of the public or utility right-of-way, a "cleanout" shall be installed.
The cleanout shall consist of a "wye" branch connection, 45-degree bend, riser
pipe, and threaded plug installed flush with finished ground elevation. The end
of the utility owner's sewer service connection shall terminate at the end of the
pipe which will normally extend five feet beyond the "wye" branch for the
cleanout. A watertight plug shall be installed at the end of this line until such
time as the property owner connects their facilities to the sewer system. In
addition, one cleanout shall be constructed for:
1. Every four 45-degree changes located in series (a long sweep is
equivalent to two 45-degree bends); and
2. At intervals no greater than 100 feet.
I. When the depth of cut is over 8 feet and the grade of a sanitary sewer is lower
than necessary to serve abutting property, and at such other locations as may
be designated by the Engineer, the Contractor may install the service line with a
22 1/2 or 45 degree bend just upstream of the cleanout assembly to bring the
service line up to the necessary elevation.
I
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 36
I

J. Unless required service depth is noted on construction Plans, the Contractor
shall contact the Engineer and request confirmation of grade prior to
constructing any sewer service line at a depth greater than 8 feet.
3.8 REINSTATING EXISTING SEWER SERVICE LINES
A. Where existing sewer mains are being rehabilitated, sewer service lines shall
be constructed for each property that is occupied by a business or dwelling if it
is currently served by the system being rehabilitated.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to locate and connect all existing sewer
service lines to the new main. In the event a service is missed during
construction, the Contractor shall return to the site and perform all work
necessary to reinstate the connection. The Contractor will be compensated in
accordance with the original contract unit pricing; however, re-mobilization to
the site will not be paid for. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for
any costs associated with a sanitary sewer overflow and associated damage to
public or private property through the omission of reinstating an active sewer
service.
C. Service lines 4 inches or less in diameter shall be tapped into the sewer main,
not into a manhole. Service connections 6 inches or greater shall only be made
into an existing or proposed manhole, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
3.9 ABANDONMENT OF EXISTING SEWERS AND MANHOLES
A. Manholes which are to be abandoned shall first have both influent and effluent
lines plugged inside the manhole with watertight masonry or concrete. The
manhole will then be filled with non-compressible material (crushed stone or
materials approved by the Engineer), to a point not less than 3 feet below the
finish grade. The remainder of the manhole shall be broken down and
removed. Then the excavation shall be backfilled to finish grade as specified in
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving".
B. Abandoned mains at active manholes shall be completely disconnected from
the manhole by cutting the pipe outside the manhole and then plugging the
abandoned main and the manhole wall with watertight masonry. The invert
shall then be rebuilt to conform to these specifications.
C. Exposed sections of abandoned mains shall be removed to a point not less
than 5 feet from the adjacent banks or surface waters. The remaining ends of
the pipe shall be plugged with watertight masonry. Concrete piers or collars in
the creek channel shall be removed completely. Concrete piers or collars not
located in the creek channel shall be removed to a point 3 feet below the finish
grade. Steel piers shall be cut off 3 feet below finish grade.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 37

D. The minimum length of watertight masonry plugs will be the diameter of the
abandoned pipe plus 1 foot.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I
A. The Contractor shall maintain the project, insofar as his construction work is
concerned, in first class condition for such time as is necessary to satisfy the
Engineer that all installations are correct and acceptable.
B. Line Cleaning: Prior to inspection of any section(s) of gravity sanitary sewer
pipe or force main the Contractor shall completely clean the lines of all debris,
silt, etc. The pipe line shall be ready for use by the Owner and shall be proved
to be in first class condition and constructed properly in accordance with the
drawings and specifications.
C. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer that all or portions of the work are
ready for testing. All testing shall be scheduled with the Engineer, who will I
coordinate with the Owner, and respond to the Contractor regarding a mutually
available date and time for the necessary testing. All testing shall be done in
the presence of the Engineer. All labor, equipment, water, and other materials,
including meters and gauges, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own
expense.
D. Inspection and Testing of Gravity Sewers:
1. Alignment and grade between manholes shall be tested by the Engineer
by flashing a light between manholes. A full circle of light shall be seen
when reviewed from the adjoining end of the line. All defects disclosed as
a result of this test shall be corrected by the Contractor at his expense.
2. PVC pipe shall pass a go-no go mandrel sized to 95 percent of the pipe
diameter (as defined in ASTM D-3034) with the pipe in place and properly
backfilled. All pipe which will not pass the mandrel shall be relaid or
replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. The chart that follows
indicates the required mandrel diameter for specific sizes of SDR 35 PVC
piping. The allowable deflection (less than 5 percent) for other pipe sizes
and types shall be calculated using the pipe stiffness formula in ASTM D
2321. The mandrel test shall not take place until the final backfill has
been in place for a minimum of 30 days.
Nominal Pipe Size Pipe I.D. (SDR 35) Required Mandrel O.D.
8" 7.665" 7.28"
10" 9.563" 9.08"
12" 11.361" 10.79"
15" 13.898" 13.20"
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 38

3. The mandrel shall be pulled through each section of pipe from manhole to
manhole. The mandrel must slide freely through the pipe with only a
nominal hand force applied. No mechanical device shall be used in
pulling the mandrel. Any pipe which refuses the mandrel shall be
removed and replaced. Such sections shall be re-tested for deflection 30
days after completion of trench backfill.
4. Mandrel testing may be performed by the Owner at any time prior to the
expiration of the one-year warranty. Any pipe which refuses the mandrel
shall be replaced by the Contractor as described above at no cost to the
Owner.
5. When the sewers are completed, they shall be inspected by the Engineer
for conformance with the provisions of the plans and specifications,
particularly line and grade. All visible and audible leaks will be repaired.
6. The infiltration into each section of the sewer shall be measured in wet
weather by the temporary installation of suitable V-notch weir. This weir
shall be furnished, installed, and removed by the Contractor. Infiltration
test limits shall be applied to single reaches of pipe, up to one mile in
length, of the same diameter. For pipes 8 inches through 15 inches in
diameter, infiltration into the sewer system (including manholes) shall not
exceed 50 gallons per mile of sewer per inch of inside diameter of the
sewer per 24 hours, and in no case shall it exceed 3,000 gallons per mile
per 24 hours. For all pipe sizes larger than 15 inches in diameter,
infiltration into the sewer system (including manholes) shall not exceed
100 gallons per mile of sewer per inch of inside diameter of the sewer per
24 hours, and in no case shall it exceed 3,000 gallons per mile per 24
hours.
7. If infiltration into the whole system or any segment thereof exceeds the
requirements described above, necessary corrective measures shall be
taken by the Contractor to limit the infiltration to the maximum specified
above. The Engineer shall decide the number and length of segments of
sewer line on which the testing shall be performed.
8. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities and personnel and conduct low
pressure air tests on all completed sections of gravity sewer. Air tests for
PVC and DIP lines shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C828.
Air tests for concrete pipe 30 inches in diameter and smaller shall be
performed in accordance with ASTM C924. Air tests will not be required
on pipe with diameters exceeding 30 inches. Acceptance of pipes
exceeding 30 inches will be based on infiltration tests and/or visual
inspection of the joints.
9. The acceptance air test shall be made after backfilling has been
completed and compacted and in the presence of the Engineer. For
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 39

ductile iron pipelines, test in accordance with the applicable requirements
of ASTM C924. For PVC pipelines test in accordance with ASTM F1417-
98.
10. The Contractor shall furnish an air compressor of the necessary capacity
along with all necessary plugs, valves, pressure gages, air hoses,
connections, and other equipment necessary to conduct the air tests.
Plugs in sewers 18 inches in size and larger shall be connected by steel
cable for thrust reaction.
11. Compressor capacity shall be sufficient to pressurize the sewer main to 4
PSIG within a time equal to or less than the required test time. The
following equation may be used to ensure compliance with this
requirement:
0.17 x D2 x L C= +Q
Where:C=Required Compressor Capacity (cfm)
T=Required Test Time (min)
D=Pipe Internal Diameter (feet)
L=Length of Test Section (feet)
Q=Allowable Air Loss Rate (cfm)
The following allowable air loss rates will be used for all pipe tests:
Pipe Size Q (cfm) Pipe Size Q(cfm)
4" 2.0 15" 4.0
6" 2.0 18" 5.0
8" 2.0 21" 5.5
10" 2.5 24" 6.0
12" 3.0
12. The sewer section shall be plugged at both ends and air pressure shall be
applied until the pressure inside the pipe reaches 4 PSIG. When a stable
condition has been reached, the pressure shall be bled back to 3.5 PSIG.
At 3.5 PSIG, the time and pressure shall be observed and recorded. If
groundwater is present at the sewer, the height of the groundwater above
the top of the pipe shall be added to the above air pressure readings
(height of water in feet X 0.433 = air pressure in psig). A minimum of five
(5) readings will be required for each test.
13. If the time for the air pressure to decrease from 3.5 PSIG to 2.5 PSIG is
equal to or greater than that shown in the following table, the pipe shall be
presumed to be free from defect. When these times are not attained, pipe
breakage, joint leakage, or leaking plugs are indicated and the cause must
be determined and corrected. After repairs have been made, the sewer
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 40

sections shall be retested. This process shall be repeated until all sewer
sections pass the air tests.
Pipe Specification Time for Length Shown (Minutes : Seconds)
Diameter
(inches) 100ft 150ft 200ft 250ft 300ft 350ft 400ft 450ft
8 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24
10 9:26 9:26 9:26 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:48
12 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38
15 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:35 40:04
18 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41
21 19:50 26:10 34:54 43:37 52:21 61:00 69:48 78:31
24 22:47 34:11 45:34 56:58 68:22 79:46 91:10 102:33
14. For testing a sewer system with one or more installed service lateral
pipes, an effective pipe length shall be added to the total sewer main pipe
length. The equation used to calculate Effective Pipe Length is as follows:
d2xl
Le= D2
Where: Le=Effective Pipe Length (added to Total Test Length)
d=Diameter of Service Lateral Pipe
1=Length of Sewer Lateral
D=Diameter of Sewer Main Pipe being tested
15. Failure of any section of the pipeline to meet the requirements of this test
shall cause the Contractor to determine, at his own expense, the source(s)
of leakage, and repair or replace all defective materials or workmanship.
The repaired section(s) of line shall be re-tested to ensure conformance
with the requirements of these contract specifications.
E. Inspection and Testing of Sewer Force Mains:
1. When the sanitary sewer force main is completed, the Engineer shall
inspect the line for conformance with the provisions of the drawings and
specifications, particularly with respect to alignment and depth. The
minimum depth of all force mains shall be 36 inches unless otherwise
specified.
2. All newly constructed sanitary sewer force main and valved sections shall
be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure-leakage test. Hydrostatic testing
shall be conducted only after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have
fully hardened. Force mains shall be tested in sections not to exceed
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 41

I
4,000 linear feet per test section. The Contractor shall install sufficient
additional valves if not shown on the drawings to allow for testing.
3. HDPE pipe shall be hydrostatically tested after joining into continuous
lengths prior to installation and again after installation. Pressure and
temperature shall be monitored with certified instruments during the test.
After this test, the water will be removed with pigs. Erosion prevention
procedures shall be used during removal and discharge of the water.
Hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with these
specifications.
4. Each completed section of the pipeline shall be plugged at both ends and '
slowly filled with water. As the main is being filled with water in
preparation of the test, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. The main
shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the
maximum system operating pressure or 100 pounds per square inch,
whichever is greater, for a period of two hours unless otherwise specified.
Pressure shall be applied to the main by means of a hand pump for small
lines or by use of a gasoline pump or fire engine for larger lines.
5. The rate of leakage shall be determined at 15-minute intervals by means
of volumetric measure of the water added during the test until the rate has
stabilized at the constant value for three consecutive 15 minute periods.
6. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied into the newly
laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, necessary to maintain the
specified leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water
and the air expelled. No piping installation will be accepted until the
leakage is less than ten (10) gallons per inch of pipe diameter per mile of
pipe per 24 hours. I
7. Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves discovered in
consequence of this test shall be removed and replaced with sound
materials, and the test shall be repeated until the test results are
satisfactory. Precautions shall be taken to remove or otherwise protect
equipment in, or attached to, pipe to prevent damage or injury thereto.
8. Tests of insulated and concealed piping shall be made before the piping is
covered or concealed. No leakage will be allowed under the above tests
for piping in buildings, structures or on bridges.
9. Ductile iron force main piping shall be tested in accordance with
AWWA C600, while all PVC force main piping shall be tested in
accordance with AWWA M23. HDPE force main piping shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM F2164.
F. Inspection and Testing of Manholes:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 42

1. Manholes shall be constructed to provide a true circular inside diameter
with properly corbeled tops, satisfactory inverts and properly placed steps
and castings. Any visible leaks in the manholes shall be completely
stopped to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2. All sanitary sewer manholes constructed by the Contractor shall be
vacuum tested for leakage in the presence of the Engineer. Vacuum
testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C1244. The vacuum
test requirement will not apply to any existing manhole, or any existing
manhole that has been converted to a drop manhole by the Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and any appurtenant
items necessary to satisfactorily perform the vacuum test. All testing
equipment shall be approved for vacuum testing manholes.
4. Vacuum Testing Procedure:
a. Vacuum test the assembled manhole after completing pipe
connections, sealing, and allowing mortar or cement proper curing
time. Plug pipes with suitably sized and rated pneumatic or
mechanical pipe line plugs. Place plugs a minimum of 6 inches
beyond the manhole wall and brace to prevent displacement of the
plugs or pipes during testing.
b. All lifting holes shall be plugged with an approved non-shrink grout inside
and out. Manhole joints shall be grouted from the outside only. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged. The Contractor shall securely brace
the plugs in order to keep them from being drawn into the manhole. The
test head shall be placed at the inside of the top of the cone section of the
manhole and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
c. Position the vacuum tester head assembly according to the
manufacturer's recommendations. Draw a vacuum of 10 inches of
mercury, close the valve on the vacuum line and shut off the vacuum
pump and measure the time for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches of
mercury. The manhole shall pass when the time to drop to 9 inches
of mercury meets or exceeds the table below:
Manhole Vacuum Testing Time (Seconds)
Manhole Manhole Diameter (Inches)
Depth (Feet) 48 60 72
0-8 20 26 33
10 25 33 41
12 30 39 49
14 35 46 57
16 40 52 67
18 45 59 73
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700—Page 43

20 50 65 81
22 55 72 89
24 59 78 97
26 64 85 105
28 69 91 113
30 74 98 121
d. If the manhole fails the test, remove the head assembly and coat the
manhole interior with a soap and water solution and repeat the
vacuum test for approximately 30 seconds. Leaking areas will have
soapy bubbles. Make the necessary repairs and repeat the test until
the manhole passes.
5. Vacuum testing is not required on manholes with pipe connections in
excess of 30 inches in diameter.
G. Final Acceptance:
1. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, as to the satisfactory
completion of the work in any or all sections of gravity sanitary sewer pipe,
force main and manholes, included in the project.
2. Upon such notification, the Contractor shall immediately remove all
construction equipment, excess materials, tools, debris, etc. from the
site(s) and leave the same in a neat, orderly condition acceptable to the
Engineer.
3. Final landscaping requirements and restoration of surfaces shall then be
completed by the Contractor in accordance with their respective
specification sections and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 332700
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332700-Page 44

SECTION 332735 EXPOSED PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work to be performed under this Specification shall consist of furnishing and
installing all materials and performing all labor required to install exposed piping
and appurtenances as required to complete the project.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment,
incidentals and services required for the complete installation of exposed piping,
fittings, valves and appurtenances within buildings, vaults and other structures as
shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B. All work in connection with installation of exposed piping, fittings, valves and
appurtenances shall comply with all current requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. The Contractor is responsible for being familiar with and adhering to
these requirements.
C. The Contractor shall inspect the locations of the proposed work associated with
this section and shall familiarize themselves with the conditions under which the
work will be performed, and with all necessary details and the suitability of their
equipment and methods for the work required. The omission of any installation
details which may not appear within the Contract Documents shall not relieve the
Contractor of full responsibility for completing the work as necessary.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to Engineer
to include at least the following:
1. Descriptive literature, product data, and catalog cut sheets.
2. Single line piping layout for the project.
3. Manufacturer's certification of factory tests.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735-Page 1

4. If field welding is necessary, AWS issued welding certificates shall be
provided.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials shall be first quality with smooth interior and exterior surfaces, free
from cracks, blisters, honeycombs, and other imperfections, and true to
theoretical shapes and forms throughout.
B. All materials shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at the plant, or
otherpoint of deliveryfor the purpose of cullingand rejectingmaterial that does
p p
not conform to the requirements of these Specifications. Such materials shall be
marked by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove it from the project site
upon notice being received of its rejection.
C. All ductile iron, black steel, or galvanized steel piping shall be provided by a single
manufacturer. All Type 304 or 316 stainless steel piping shall be provided by a
single manufacturer. Piping manufacturers shall have at least five (5) years of
experience in manufacturing the applicable supplied pipe.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Contractor shall coordinate material deliveries with the manufacturer/supplier. All
materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations using methods that will prevent damage to the materials.
B. The Contractor shall unload pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances so as to avoid
deformation or other injury thereto. Pipe shall not be placed within pipe of a larger
size and shall not be rolled or dragged over gravel or rock during handling. If any
defective material is discovered, it shall be removed and replaced with sound pipe
or shall be repaired by the Contractor in an approved manner and at their expense.
C. The Contractor shall store all pipe and appurtenances on sills above storm
drainage level and delivered for installation. Do not store any plastic or rubber
materials in direct sunlight.
D. Protect pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances from dirt and damage.
E. When any material is damaged during transporting, unloading, handling or storing,
the undamaged portions may be used as needed, or, if damaged sufficiently, the
Engineer will reject the material as being unfit for installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. All materials shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and
materials for one (1) year following final acceptance by the Owner.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735—Page 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise shown, all exposed piping, fittings and valves shall be
ductile/cast iron as specified elsewhere within these specifications.
B. Stainless Steel Pipe:
1. Stainless steel pipe shall be Grade TP 304, Schedule 40S, 10S, or 5S, or
as indicated. Pipe shall be annealed, pickled, and passivated to comply
with ASTM A312. Fittings shall be suitable for the pipe and comply with
ASTM A403. Welding shall be in accordance with all applicable ANSI
standard.
2. Field welds shall be fusion-welded in accordance with ANSI/AWS B31.1.
All welding is to be performed by welders certified by the AWS in
accordance with the requirements set forth in the AWS D1.1 Structural
Welding Code.
3. Ends shall be flanged unless otherwise indicated on the plans.
4. Flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150.
5. Threaded ends shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. Threaded fittings
shall conform dimensionally to ANSI/ASME B16.3, Class 150.
C. Welded Steel Pipe:
1. Welded Steel Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C-200
(NSF 61 if required). Welded Steel Fittings shall be manufactured in
accordance with AWWA C-207. Flanged ends shall be faced and drilled per
ANSI B16.1 Class 125.
2. The interior of all Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings shall be lined with an epoxy
coating in accordance to AWWA C-210. The exterior of all Welded Steel
Pipe and Fittings shall have an epoxy protective coating adhering to AWWA
C-210.
3. Flange isolation kits shall be utilized between welded steel fittings and
ductile iron fittings and shall be manufactured per NSF/ANSI 61. Isolation
kits shall be manufactured by GPT Industries, APS, or approved equal.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735-Page 3

2.2 PIPING, FITTINGS, AND VALVES
A. Valves on exposed piping shall be operated by handwheel and shall have an
arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening.
B. Gate valves located inside structures shall be of the rising stem type unless
otherwise specified.
C. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. Bushings will not be allowed
unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.
D. All copper tubing shall be Type "K" flexible copper tubing in accordance with
ASTM B 88.
E. All fittings for copper tubing shall be pressure-seal (compression-type) fittings.
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. In general, hangers and supports shall be provided as necessary to rigidly
support the piping, fittings and valves. Unless explicitly stated on the drawings,
in no case shall pipe hangers and supports be spaced greater than ten feet (10'-
0") apart. Pipe hangers and supports shall be placed at or near all changes in
direction of the conduit or unit being supported. Refer to drawings that show
piping to have closer hanger and/or support spacing.
B. All supports, hangers, and accessories shall be the manufacturer of either Fee
and Mason, Grinnell, Carpenter and Patterson, Unistrut, or other approved
manufacturer of comparable experience.
C. All hangers and supporting devices shall be shipped with standard factory finish,
unless otherwise specified.
2.4 WALL AND FLOOR CASTINGS AND SLEEVES
A. Wall and floor castings shall be provided for ductile iron pipes which pass through
the walls or floors of structures below grade or below the water line of water
retaining structures.
B. Wall and floor castings shall be ductile or cast iron and shall be provided with
integral waterstops. End connections shall be flanged or plain end as indicated
on the plans.
C. Copper tubing passing through walls and floors of structures shall be installed in
sleeves. A separate sleeve shall be provided for each tube. Where sleeves pass
through exterior walls or floors of structures, or where water tightness is required,
the space between the tube and the sleeve shall be caulked on both sides with
an approved caulking material.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735—Page 4

D. Unless otherwise shown, sleeves shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 Steel
Pipe.
E. Sleeves to be caulked shall have welded waterstops on the outside and caulking
rings on the inside. Sleeves installed in walls have been flush with wall surfaces.
Floor sleeves shall have floor and ceiling plates where finished appearance is
required. Where no floor plates are required, sleeves shall extend 6" above the
finished floor.
2.5 GAUGES
A. All pressure gauges shall be stainless steel, glycerin-filled gauges with a
minimum dial size of 3 inches meeting the requirements of ASME B40.1,
Grade 1A.
B. Pressure gauges shall be selected which most completely utilize the full range of
the gauge while accommodating the maximum anticipated pressures within the
piping system.
C. Gauges shall read pressure in "pounds per square foot" and incorporate a flexible
diaphragm seal between the pressurized liquid being conveyed and the pressure
gauge. The diaphragm seal shall be either the inline-saddle type design with a
minimum diaphragm surface of 5 square inches or the complete flow-thru type
design with flange connection. Inline saddle diaphragms and housing parts
exposed to the pressurized liquid being conveyed shall be type 316 stainless
steel. The flexible cylinder protecting the sensing liquid on the flow-thru design
shall be Buna N and the flanges shall be type 316 stainless steel. The inside
diameter of the flow-thru assembly shall be the same as the adjacent discharge
piping. Gauges shall be mounted on a tap equipped with a valve to allow
complete isolation and removal of the gauge without system shut down.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. All piping is to be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer
recommendations and the contract specifications.
B. Installation manuals from various material suppliers shall be furnished to the
Engineer for his review and approval prior to installation of any material if so
requested. The Engineer may augment any manufacturer's installation
recommendations.
C. Proper tools, implements, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be
provided and used for the safe and convenient prosecution of pipe installation.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735—Page 5

D. All pipe, fittings, valves, and other materials used in the installation of pipe shall
be placed by means of suitable equipment in such a manner to prevent damage
to the pipe materials, to the protective coating on the pipe materials, and to
provide a safe working condition to all personnel.
E. Each piece of pipe, fitting, and valve being installed shall be carefully given a final
inspection to see that it is clean, sound and free of defects. Pipe shall be removed
at any time if broken, injured or displaced in the process of installation.
F. Neatly install exposed piping in plumb, vertical and horizontal alignments as
shown on the Drawings arranged such that they are parallel and at right angles
to walls and other piping and equipment and shall be graded such that the system
can be drained.
G. Alignment of piping smaller than 4-inches may not be shown. However, install
according to the Drawing's intent and with clearance and allowance for expansion
and contraction, operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists,
moving equipment, headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles,
and system drainage and air removal.
H. Changes in direction of pipes shall be made by using straight pipe and fittings.
I. When cutting short lengths of pipe, a pipe cutter, as approved by the Engineer,
will be used and care will be taken to make the cut at right angles to the center
line of the pipe or on the exact skew as shown on the plans.
J. The Contractor shall utilize restrained joints, threaded rods, or concrete thrust
blocks as required to adequately restrain all piping, fittings, and valves.
K. Isolation valves shall be restrained so that adjacent fittings or valves can be
removed with the isolation valve closed (i.e., gate valve or plug valve adjacent to
a check valve).
L. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction
movement.
M. Provide easily accessible drain points for all utility piping to allow complete
drainage of system.
3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. All pipe joints shall be constructed in strict accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's specifications and materials. Any deviation must have prior
approval of the Engineer.
B. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so there is no restraint on the opposite end
of pipe, fitting or valve which would prevent uniform gasket pressure at
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735-Page 6

connection or would cause unnecessary stresses to be transmitted to other pipe
or equipment flanges.
C. Tighten all flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform gasket
compression over entire area of joint. Provide tightening torque in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire face area
prior to installation of any bolt between piping flanges and/or equipment flanges.
E. Permit piping connected to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to
longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flanges are tightened.
F. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of
connecting piping.
G. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not before initial
fitting and alignment.
H. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble piping with
gaskets in place and a minimum of four bolts per joint installed and tightened.
Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in
relationship of piping flange with other piping, fittings, valves or equipment
flanges. Realign as necessary, install all flange bolts and make all final
connections.
I. Threaded joints shall be made tight with Teflon tape, a stiff mixture of graphite,
and oil, or inert filler and oil applied to the male thread only. Virgin Teflon tape
shall only be used.
3.3 UNIONS
A. All interior and exposed exterior piping systems shall be provided with an
adequate number of screwed unions for pipe lines 2" in diameter and less.
B. Unions shall be provided where shown on the plans and at control valves,
solenoid valves, and at other items of the connected equipment that may require
disconnection of the piping for service or maintenance.
C. Line sectionalizing unions shall be provided to facilitate the dismantling of any
branch line or of a section of the main line without disturbing the adjacent piping.
3.4 GAUGES
A. Assure gauge position is clear of equipment functions and movements and
location is protected from maintenance and operation of equipment.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735-Page 7

B. Assure gauge is readable from an accessible standing position.
3.5 EQUIPMENT DRAINAGE AND MAINTENANCE PIPING
A. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where condensation may occur.
B. Run drain piping to nearest floor drain.
C. Avoid piping over electrical components such as motor control centers,
panelboards, etc. If piping must be so routed, utilize a 16-gauge, 316 stainless
steel drop pans under piping and over full length of electrical equipment. Hard
pipe drainage to nearest floor drain.
D. Collect system condensate at drippockets, traps and blowoff valves and provide
Yp
drainage for process piping.
3.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Anchor or support exposed piping, fittings and valves subjected to dynamic forces
to prevent separation of joints and transmission of stress into equipment or
structural components not designed to resist those stresses.
B. Unless otherwise directed, no pipe, conduit, or appurtenant device shall be
supported from other piping, stairways, ladders, or walkways.
C. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped
and supported from a common trapeze-type hanger, provided hanger rods are
increased in size to account for the total supported weight. The pipe in the group
requiring the least maximum distance between supports shall set the distance
between trapeze hangers.
D. All non-rigid conduits requiring continuous support shall be laid in cable trays
adequately ventilated and of adequate size.
3.7 COPPER TUBING
A. Copper tubing shall be erected to proper lines and grades, and shall be
connected with soldered joints and fittings, or with compression fittings, as
specified or as shown. Joints in copper tubing to be installed in concrete will not
be permitted. Tubing to be installed shall have the minimum practicable number
of joints.
3.8 PAINTING
A. All exposed piping shall be painted in accordance with Section 099000 of these
specifications.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735-Page 8

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After the pipe and appurtenances has been satisfactorily installed complete, the
newly installed pipe and valve sections shall be subjected to a hydrostatic
pressure leakage test.
B. Exposed waterlines shall be tested in conjunction with other water system testing
in accordance with all applicable AWWA standards.
C. Exposed sewer force mains shall be tested in conjunction with other sewer force
main testing in accordance with Section 332700 of these specifications.
D. No leakage will be allowed under the above tests for piping in buildings and
structures. Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves discovered in
consequence of this test shall be removed and replaced with sound materials,
and the test shall be repeated until the test results are satisfactory.
E. Precautions shall be taken to remove or otherwise protect equipment in, or
attached to, pipe lines to prevent damage or injury thereto.
F. Tests of insulated and concealed piping shall be made before the piping is
covered or concealed.
G. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing with
all testing done in the presence of the Engineer. All labor, equipment, water and
materials, including gauges, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own
expense.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing and maintain pipe in
clean condition during installation.
B. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then
properly dress and make joint.
C. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings,
dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the system.
D. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean work
installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves and
fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which may have accumulated by
operation of system, from testing, or from other causes. Repair any stoppage or
discoloration or other damage to any equipment, the building, its finish, or
furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to the
Owner.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735—Page 9

3.11 STERILIZATION
A. After successfully completion of testing, all exposed water lines shall be sterilized
in conjunction with other water system sterilization in accordance with AVVVVA
standards.
END OF SECTION 332735
June 2021 Project#21.00317 332735—Page 10

I
SECTION 432613 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMPS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The contractor shall furnish and install submersible centrifugal type with
recessed pumping impeller, integrally built-in grinder unit, and submersible
motor. Pump(s) shall be installed on lift- out rail system(s) in order to allow for
easy removal without requiring entry into the wetwell. Contractor shall include
all labor, materials, equipment, incidentals, and ancillary components to make a
complete system.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Pump(s) shall be installed in such a way that solids are fed in an upflow direction
to the grinder impeller with no feet, rails, or other obstructions below
grinder inlet. Grinder shall be capable of macerating materials in normal
domestic sewerage, including items used in maintaining normal sanitary
hygiene such as: disposable diapers, sanitary napkins, rubber, and the like into
a fine slurry. Pump shall not be intended to handle abrasive materials or
sewage containing large excessive amounts of sand,grit, or other stone like
compositions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The grinder pump station shall be supplied by a reputable
manufacturer with at least five (5) years experience in the manufacture of
submersible grinder pumps.
B. Factory Tests: The pumps shall be tested at the factory under simulated field
conditions for excessive vibration, leaks, and operation of all automatic
systems. The controls shall be adjusted to start and stop the pumps to
satisfy field conditions. For each unit, a pump performance curve shall be
produced from the factory testing. Its veracity shall be certified, and the
curves shall be identifiable by serial numbers of pumps and motors.
Manufacturer shall submit size copies of the certified curves to the Engineer.
Engineer will judge adequacy of performance and distribute copies of curves
appropriately.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
June 2021 Project#21.00317 432613-Page 1

A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit five (5) sets of shop drawings
and/or wiring diagrams for the major equipment to be installed such as the
pump and motor starters and controls.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Three (3) copies of a standard
operation and maintenance manual for the pump units shall be supplied by the
Contractor.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All equipment shall be delivered, stored, and handled in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall be guaranteed for a
period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner against
faulty design, defective materials, and faulty workmanship. Upon receipt of
notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the work during the guaranty
period, the affected work shall be repaired or replaced promptly at the expense
of the Contractor.
1.7 MANUFACTURING AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely and
permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished under
this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-corrosive
material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or otherwise
permanently stamped on the nameplate and shall be fully legible. The
information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall include at least the
following:
1. Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address, and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed, and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
June 2021 Project#21.00317 432613-Page 2

Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these requirements
will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker shall
be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the name,
address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied the
equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local business
that can provide service and replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour
emergency service telephone number should also be included.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 PUMP SCHEDULE
A. Pump sizes within this schedule are given for reference. The Contractor
shall replace existing submersible grinder pumps with units of equivalent
size and capacity to be verified during construction. All new pumps shall
be of the same manufacturer as the existing unit unless the existing pump
does not meet the requirements of this specification. In this event, this
specification shall govern, and the Contractor shall provide a pump of
equivalent capacity that meets the requirements listed herein.
B. Brandymill Lift Station:
1. Pumps Required: 2
2. Motor: 2 hp, 1.75 S.F., 230V, 1 phase, 60-Hz
C. Jonathan Creek Lift Station:
1. Pumps Required: 2
2. Motor: 5 hp, 1.75 S.F., 230V, 1 phase, 60-Hz
D. Sunset Ridge Lift Station:
1. Pumps Required: 2
2. Motor: 2 hp, 1.75 S.F., 230V, 1 phase, 60-Hz
E. Homeplace Lift Station:
1. Pumps Required: 2
P2. Motor: 3 hp, 1.75 S.F., 230V, 1 phase, 60-Hz
F. Etowah Reach Lift Station:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 432613-Page 3

1. Pumps Required: 2
2. Motor: 3 hp, 1.75 S.F., 230V, 1 phase, 60-Hz
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Pump and motor assembly shall be FM listed for Class 1, Group D
hazardous location service.
B. Shaft: The common motor pump and grinder shaft shall be of #416
stainless steel and threaded to pump impeller and grinder impeller.
C. Impeller: Pump impellers shall provide unobstructed passage through the
volute for ground solids. Impeller shall be of type 316 stainless steel and
shall be threaded onto a stainless-steel shaft.
D. Motors: Pump motor shall be of the totally enclosed, submersible, squirrel
cage induction type rated for the horse powers listed herein at 3450 rpm,
60 Hz. Motors shall be rated for the phase and voltage as listed within this
section. Single phase motors shall be of capacitor start, capacitor run,
NEMA L type. Three phase motors shall be NEMA B type. Stator winding
shall be of the open type with Class F insulation good for 311 °F maximum
operating temperature. All bearings associated with motor operation shall
be designed for 50,000 hours B-10 life. A heat sensor thermostat shall be
attached on top end of motor winding to stop motor if winding temperature
reaches 221 °F. Thermostat shall reset automatically when motor cools.
Three heat sensors shall be used on three phase motors.
E. Seals: Motors shall be protected by two mechanical seals mounted in
tandem with a seal chamber between the seals. Seal chamber shall be oil
filled to lubricate seal face and to transmit heat from shaft to outer shell.
Seal face shall be carbon and ceramic and lapped to a flatness of one
light band.
F. The pump shall be painted with a manufacturer standard waterborne
hybrid acrylic/alkyd paint. All fasteners are to be A300 series stainless
steel.
2.3 CONTROLS
1. Meadows Control Pane_ l (PCP-M): This control panel will control a duplex
submersible lift station that operates 3 HP pumps at 208V, 3 phase. The
scope of work associated with this control panel shall include, but not
necessarily limited to the following:
a. UL 508 Listed Control Panel
June 2021 Project#21.00317 432613-Page 4

I
b. 208 V, 3 phase single point power connection
1 c. Power distribution blocks.
d. DIN Rails.
e. Control system protection (fuses or circuit breakers).
I f. Control transformer and power supplies.
g. Integral 50 KA per phase surge protection device with L-L and L-G
operating modes, UL 1449, 4th Edition listed.
h. NEMA 4X, stainless steel enclosure with pad-lockable outer hinged
door and inner hinged panel for mounting control devices (indicators
and switches).
I i. Panel anti-condensation heater.
j. Non-resettable elapsed time indicators for each pump.
k. PLC control system with Ethernet com port and required I/O and with
I battery backup. Provide final PLC program to owner via CD.
I. Individual relays to include plug-in bases.
m. Main circuit breaker disconnect switch with inner panel mounted
I operating handle interlocked with inner panel such that inner panel
will not open when switch is in the ON position.
n. Provide a NEMA rated ATL combination starter with overload
' protection and a circuit breaker for overcurrent protection/disconnect
for each pump.
o. Control Description:
I 1) The level shall be controlled using five weighted float level
sensors for low level alarm, pump(s) off, lead influent pump on,
lag influent pump on, and high-water alarm. The influent pumps
I will pump based only on the float switches.
2) Provide time delays between the four pumps such that they are
not called to start simultaneously.
I 3) Each of the influent pumps shall alternate after each pump
cycle.
p. High level audible alarm and red LED rotating indicating beacon light
I on top of panel with auto reset and silence switch.
q. Pump or controller failure will lockout pump and switch to single or
two pump operation.
r. Run light for each pump.
s. High temperature detection for each pump. Operation shall shut
down and lockout pump. Provide high temperature indicating light
and manual reset switch for each pump.
t. Seal failure detection for each pump. Operation shall activate alarm.
Provide seal failure indicating light for each pump.
u. 22 mm metallic LED indicating lights with engraved phenolic
functional description plate (attached with stainless steel screws).
v. 22 mm metallic switches with engraved phenolic functional
description plate (attached with stainless steel screws).
Iw. Provide Fiber Optic Ethernet communication between IPCP-100 and
RTU-200.
IJune 2021 Project#21.00317 432613-Page 5
I

x. Complete wiring diagrams showing both factory and field installed
wiring.
y. Factory labeled terminal strips for all field connections. Coordinate
labeling with wiring diagram indications.
z. Wire and cable management ducts.
aa. One year warranty
bb. All wiring connections to be made at terminal strips (no wire nuts).
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. All necessary piping, fittings, adapters, etc. shall be provided to insure a
complete and satisfactory installation of the pumping equipment.
C. Install piping, fittings, and other appurtenances to the pump installation in
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, the
requirements of referenced sections included with these specifications and
as shown on the Drawings. Equipment shall be installed in a workmanlike
manner so that individual equipment will function properly and freely, and
no individual parts shall be strained.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. After pump has been completely installed, the Contractor shall conduct, in
the presence of the Engineer, testing of all mechanical equipment and
piping as in operation to demonstrate capacity, correct alignment, smooth
operation, proper adjustment, and freedom from noise, vibration, over-
heating and leaking, and to ensure satisfactory compliance with the
specifications. All defects shall be corrected. The Contractor shall supply
all oil, grease, electric power, water, and all other material necessary to
complete the field tests.
B. If the pump performance does not meet the Specifications, corrective
measures shall be taken by the Contractor, or pump shall be removed and
replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified.
C. Pump Field Testing:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 432613-Page 6

II
�I
1. Upon completion of all the mechanical work, the Contractor shall
conduct testing as specified herein to demonstrate that the
equipment performs in accordance with all specifications.
2. The Contractor shall perform initial testing of the equipment to
insure himself that the tests listed in the Demonstration Test
paragraph below can be completed.
3. The Demonstration Test shall demonstrate that all items of these
Specifications have been met by the equipment, as installed, and
shall include the following tests:
a. That the pump can deliver the specified pressure and
discharge flow.
b. That the pump controls perform satisfactorily.
4. In the event that the equipment does not meet the Demonstration
Test, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make sure changes
and adjustments in the equipment which he deems necessary and
shall conduct further tests until written certification is received from
the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 432613
June 2021 Project#21.00317 432613-Page 7

1
I
SECTION 462156 WEDGE WIRE SCREEN
IPART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install one Stato Screen for collecting and removing debris from
the incoming wastewater flow.
I B. The stato screens shall be provided complete with all accessories, spare
parts, mounting anchor bolts, and other appurtenances as specified and as
may be required for a complete operational system. I
I C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the stato screens
and appurtenances furnished and installed shall be compatible with and
have the necessary operating clearances to the structural elements and
Iassociated equipment shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
B. American Welding Society (AWS)
C. Steel Structures Painting Council, American National Standards Institute
(SSPC)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawing Submittals shall include at least the following:
1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing important details of
construction dimensions, anchor bolt locations, and field
connections.
2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and catalogs of the equipment.
3. Installation, operation, and start-up procedures.
4. Total weight of the equipment including the weight of the single
largest item.
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submit operations and maintenance manuals in three ring binders for the
equipment in compliance with the Contract documents. Manuals shall
include:
1. Contact name, address, and telephone number of the equipment
Manufacturer's Service Department and Parts Department.
2. Descriptive literature, including illustrations, covering the operational
features of the equipment, specific for the particular installation, with
all inapplicable information omitted or marked out.
3. Operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting information.
4. Complete maintenance parts list.
5. Complete connection, interconnecting, and assembly diagrams.
6. Approved shop drawings including complete electrical information.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 462156—Page 1
I__

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The materials covered by these specifications are intended to be standard
equipment of proven reliability and as manufactured by a reputable
Manufacturer having experience in the production of screening equipment.
The equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed in accordance
with the best practices and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when
installed as shown on the Contract Drawings and operated per the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. The Manufacturer shall have designed and manufactured static screens for
a minimum of ten (10) years.
C. The design is based on a Model SS-36 Stato Screen as manufactured by
Vulcan Industries, Inc. of Missouri Valley, Iowa.
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Number of Units One (1)
B. Maximum Flow Rate 325 GPM each
C. Screen Openings 0.100 inches
1.07 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall store and temporarily support equipment prior to
installation in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations
and instructions. Protect all exposed surfaces. Keep records of the storage
parameters and the dates that storage procedures were performed. The
Contractor shall be responsible for work, equipment, and materials until
inspected, tested and finally accepted.
B. Protect the equipment from being contaminated by dust, dirt, vibration and
moisture.
C. The unit shall be erected in strict accordance with the instructions of the
Manufacturer's field Engineer.
D. The Stato Screen shall be shipped as a complete unit including the screen
panel. The unit shall be erected in strict accordance with the instructions in
the O&M manual.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers are as listed.
1. Model SS-36 Stato Screen as manufactured by Vulcan Industries,
Inc. of Missouri Valley, Iowa.
2. Approved Equal
B. Basis of design is Vulcan Industries, Inc. Contractors proposing substitute
or equal manufacturers shall be responsible for all costs for revisions
associated with system including, but not limited to, redesign of engineering,
structural, mechanical, electrical, civil, and controls.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 462156—Page 2

I
2.02 GENERAL
A. The Stato Screen furnished shall remove debris from the incoming
wastewater flow stream by means of a fixed, wedge-wire screening panel.
The screening panel shall be secured within a screen cabinet as shown on
the Contract Drawings. In addition to the screening panel, the cabinet shall
consist of a flanged inlet, flanged outlet, drain connection and an influent
headbox chamber. The debris screened from the influent water shall be
discarded in the appropriate receiving device.
2.03 SCREEN CABINET
A. The screen cabinet shall be manufactured of a minimum 10-gauge, 304
stainless steel and shall be equipped with a 6-inch nominal diameter flanged
inlet pipe connection and an 8-inch nominal diameter flanged outlet pipe
connection. The inlet and outlet shall be manufactured of Schedule 10 pipe
with ANSI 125 lb. flanges. The cabinet shall be fitted with a 3-inch diameter
headbox drain coupling with plug. All connections shall be secured to the
screen cabinet with full penetration welds.
B. The screen cabinet shall include an integral influent headbox chamber to
receive incoming flow and distribute it evenly over the overflow weir. The
weir shall be the full width of the screen cabinet. A hinged flow distribution
baffle shall also be furnished the full width of the screen cabinet. All
materials shall be type 304 stainless steel.
C. Hinged cover doors having neoprene seals on screen mating surfaces shall
enclose the screen front. Gas springs shall assist the opening of the door
and hold the door in the open position. The cover assembly shall be
constructed as shown on the layout drawing and bolted to the front flanges
of the screen cabinet. The cover door, hinge, gas springs and attaching
hardware shall be manufactured of type 304 stainless steel.
2.04 SCREEN PANEL
A. The screen panel shall be a single curved section positioned in the screen
cabinet to follow the contour of 25-35-45 degrees to a vertical reference.
The panel shall be constructed of a wavy wedge-wire material having a
triangular cross section. The wedge-wire shall have a minimum width of
0.109-inch with a minimum depth of 0.156-inch and shall have a 26-degree
included angle from vertical reference and shall be attached to 5/16-inch
diameter vertical support rods placed 4-inch on center across the screen
width. Each wedge-wire shall be formed to a triple arc between the vertical
support rods with a radius of approximately 1 1/4-inch per arc. These arcs
shall be placed in the direction of fluid flow. The screen panel shall be 36-
inches wide by 54-inches long as measured on an 80-inch radius. The
screen opening size shall be 0.100-inch. There shall be a contoured drip
lip secured to the bottom of the screen panel to direct excess free water to
the discharge side of the screen chamber. The screen panel shall be pivot
mounted from the middle to allow the screen to be raised for cleaning from
the backside.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 462156-Page 3

B. All materials utilized in the construction of the screen panel shall be type
304 stainless steel.
2.05 DISCHARGE DROP CHUTE
A. A screenings discharge drop chute shall be provided and shall be
configured as shown on the Contract Drawings. Drop chute construction
shall be minimum 10-gauge 304 stainless steel.
2.06 FASTENERS
A. All fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated in this
specification. All threaded fasteners shall be coated with a nickel based
anti-seize thread lubricant prior to assembly.
2.07 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Stainless steel and plastic components shall not be coated. The stainless-
steel structural components shall be passivated per the methods described
in ASTM A380-99, after fabrication to remove embedded iron, surface rust
and weld burn.
B. All other surfaces shall be solvent cleaned to remove dirt, oil, and foreign
materials. Cleaned surfaces shall be shop primed with one (1) coat of
TNEMEC Series N69-1212 primer, or equal, to attain a minimum dry film
thickness of 2.5 mils.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
A. The Stato Screen shall be factory assembled and factory tested by the
Quality Control Manager to insure leak-free operation prior to shipment.
The test results shall be certified in writing and a copy shall be provided to
the Owner to certify compliance.
3.02 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall warrant that the supplied equipment shall be free
from defects in material and workmanship and that it will replace or repair,
F.O.B. its factory, any part or parts, which examination shall show to have
failed under normal use and service by the user within eighteen (18) months
following initial shipment or twelve (12) months following operation start up,
whichever occurs first.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 462156—Page 4

II
II
II SECTION 466600 OPEN CHANNEL UV TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
A
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances required to provide
an open channel gravity flow ultraviolet (UV) disinfection system. To be
complete and operational with all control equipment and accessories as shown
and specified.
1 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Pre-qualification Requirements: Any alternate UV manufacturer that is not
named or listed as approved equal must submit the following 15 days prior to
bid to be considered for approval:
I1. To be considered, the manufacturer will be regularly engaged in the
manufacture of UV systems with a proven track record of at least one
I
thousand (1,000) municipal installations in North America.
2. The manufacturer will provide documentation of previous experience with
municipal UV disinfection systems in wastewater applications with electronic
ballasts.
3. Pre-qualification submittals from manufacturers will include a complete and
detailed proposal of equipment offered, including the number of lamps
proposed and a detailed description of any exceptions taken to the
specification.
4. To be considered, the manufacturer will submit a bioassay evaluation for the
proposed reactor. This bioassay will have been validated by an
independent third party and have followed protocols described in the US
EPA Design Manual — Municipal Wastewater Disinfection (EPA/625/1-
86/021), without exception. The manufacturer's bioassay report must
demonstrate that the proposed UV system design and number of lamps will
deliver the specified dose.
5. Documentation of UV manufacturer's service capabilities including location
and experience.
6. Sample disinfection performance guarantee including scope and duration of
guarantee- minimum of 5 years required.
7. All UV manufacturers will be required to pre-qualify, unless the manufacturer
is the base bid manufacturer.
B. Design Criteria
June 2021 Project#21.00317 466600-Page 1

1. Provide equipment which will disinfect an effluent with the following
characteristics:
a. Peak Flow: 312,500 GPD
b. Total Suspended Solids: 30 mg/L monthly average
c. Ultraviolet Transmittance @ 253.7 nm: 65
d. Annual Effluent Temperature Range: 33 to 85 °F or 0 to 29 °C
e. Effluent standard to be guaranteed: 200 / 100 ml FC based
30 day Geometric Mean of consecutive daily grab samples 400 /
100 ml FC based on daily maximum grab sample
2. The UV equipment will be installed in a stainless steel channel furnished as
part of this system, and having dimensions as shown on the drawings.
3. The system supplied is based on the Trojan 3400, two banks in series (one
duty/ one standby fully redundant) and will be arranged in the following
manner.
a. Number of Lamps in each UV Lamp Module: 4
b. Number of UV Lamp Modules: 4 per bank (8 total)
c. Number of UV Banks: 2
d. Total number of Lamps: 16 per bank (32 total)
4. The lamp array configuration will be evenly spaced in both horizontal and
vertical rows with all lamps parallel to each other and to the effluent flow.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. The UV system will be designed to deliver a minimum UV dose of 40,000
pWs/cm2 or 40 mJ/cm2, in effluent with a UV Transmission of 65% after
reductions for quartz sleeve absorption, sleeve fouling, and lamp aging. The
basis for evaluating the UV dose delivered by the UV system will be the
manufacturer's bioassay as carried out by an independent third party.
Bioassay validation methodology to follow protocols described in US EPA
Design Manual - Municipal Wastewater Disinfection (EPA/625/1-86/021),
without exception.
2. The UV system will produce a permitted effluent stated in Paragraph
1.2.B.1.e above. Grab samples will be taken in accordance with the
Microbiology Sampling Techniques found in Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater, 19th Ed.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
June 2021 Project#21.00317 466600-Page 2

III
I'll
Submit for review shop drawings showing the following:
1. Complete description in sufficient detail to permit an item comparison with
the specification.
1 2.3. Dimensions and installation requirements.
Descriptive information including catalog cuts and manufacturers
specifications for components.
III4. Electrical schematics and layouts.
5. Independent bioassay report demonstrating dose delivered under design
conditions.
6. Experience documentation.
1.4 GUARANTEE
A. Equipment: The equipment furnished under this section will be free of defects in
material and workmanship, including damages that may be incurred during
shipping for a period of 12 months from date of substantial completion or 18
months after shipment, whichever comes first.
B. UV Lamps: The UV lamps to be warranted for a minimum of 12,000 hours (non-
prorated) or thirty-six (36) calendar months from shipment,whichever comes first.
Pro-rated lamp warranties will not be accepted. On / off cycles are limited to an
average of four (4) per day without exception.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Trojan Technologies, of London, Ontario, Canada. If other equipment is proposed,
the Contractor must demonstrate to the Engineer and the Owner that all
requirements of materials, validation, experience, performance, and workmanship
have been met or exceeded by the equipment proposed. Contractors proposing
alternate manufacturers will be responsible for all costs associated with system
evaluation and redesign including all electrical, mechanical, and civil aspects of
the installation.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide a UV disinfection system complete with UV lamp modules, effluent
channel (if stainless steel), level control, and UV monitoring system as shown on
the Contract Drawings and as herein specified.
B. UV system will be designed for complete outdoor installation, without shelter or
supplemental cooling or heating required.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 466600-Page 3

2.3 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All material in contact with effluent will be stainless steel or quartz.
2. All material exposed to UV light will be stainless steel, anodized aluminum,
quartz 214, or Teflon TM
B. UV Module (UVM):
1. Each UV lamp module will consist of 4 lamps and their corresponding
electronic ballast. Each lamp will be enclosed in its individual quartz sleeve,
one end of which will be closed and the other end sealed by a lamp end seal
and holder.
2. The electrical wires connecting the lamps to the electronic ballasts will be
enclosed in the stainless-steel frame. Systems where lamp wiring is
submerged in the effluent and exposed to UV light will not be allowed.
3. Each UV module will be provided with a standard 120 Volt plug and
weatherproof cable for connection to a receptacle. The cable will be 10 feet
(3.0 m) long. A total of 6 UV modules will be supplied. Lamp status will be
displayed on top of each UV module using watertight LED indicator lights.
4. Modules will be approximately 68.2 inches long, 20.1 inches high and 2.26
inches wide, weighing approximately 38 lbs. Materials of construction will
be stainless steel type 316, anodized aluminum, quartz 214, and Teflon TM,
with UL rating of Type 6P.
C. UV Lamps:
1. UV system will use low pressure mercury slimline lamps of the hot cathode,
instant start design.
2. 90% of UV output will be within the wavelengths of 233.7 to 273.7 nm.
3. The operating life of the lamp will be guaranteed for 12,000 hours, non-pro-
rated.
4. Independent validation of lamps aging factor is required.
D. Lamp End Seal and Lamp Holder:
1. The open end of the lamp sleeve will be sealed by means of a sleeve nut
which threads onto a sleeve cup and compresses the sleeve '0' ring.
2. The sleeve nut will have a knurled surface to allow a positive handgrip for
tightening. The sleeve nut will not require any tools for removal.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 466600—Page 4

II
E. UV Lamp Sleeves:
1. Quartz sleeves to be Type 214 clear fused quartz circular tubing as
manufactured by General Electric or equal.
2. Quartz to be rated for UV transmission of 89% and not subject to
solarization.
3. The nominal wall thickness will be 1.0 to 2.0 mm to maximize UV
transmission.
F. Effluent Channel:
1. Each UV unit will be provided by UV manufacturer with one (1) effluent
stainless steel channel complete with drain, UV module support rack and
downstream level control weir.
2. The effluent channel will have the dimensions as per the drawings.
G. Level Control Weir:
1. Weir will be located downstream of the UV modules to maintain an average
water depth of 6 inches and ensure lamp submergence at all times.
2. Maximum effluent level variance from zero to peak flow will not exceed 1.5
inches (3.8 cm).
3. Weir will be welded water tight and include a drain.
H. Electrical:
1. The UV disinfection system for each of the two banks will be divided into 4
UV modules.
2. Interconnecting Cables to be standard 120 Volt, weatherproof, 10 feet (3.0
m) long and will be suitable for outdoor installation.
3. Power Distribution Receptacles:
a. 120 Volt receptacles rated for continuous outdoor use will be
provided. Receptacles will be of the duplex type complete with ground
fault interrupter circuitry.
b. Receptacles to be provided by the UV Manufacturer.
4. Power Consumption:
a. Maximum power draw to each bank of the UV System will be 1400
watts (2800 watts total).
b. All electrical supplies will be 120 Volt, 60 Hz.
June 2021 Project#21.00317 466600—Page 5

c. A separate 120 volt, 5 amp supply to be provided for the Monitoring
System.
I. Cleaning Procedure:
1. The UV lamp modules will be cleaned by removing from the effluent channel
and hand wiping the sleeves with an acid solution, using a non-abrasive
cloth.
J. Monitoring System:
1. 1 submersible UV sensor(s) will continuously monitor the UV intensity
produced in the bank of UV lamp modules. The sensor will measure the
germicidal portion of the light emitted by the UV lamps.
2. UV intensity will be indicated on a 3 character display in mW/cm2.
3. Elapsed time in hours (lamp age)will be indicated on a 5 character display.
4. Both displays will utilize LEDs and will be visible through the panel door.
5. A dry contact will be provided for remote indication of Low UV intensity
alarm.
6. Monitoring System will be enclosed in a fiberglass Type 4X wall mounted
panel and is to be located less than twelve (12) feet (3.66 m) from the LED
end of the UV Module.
K. Power Distribution Receptacle (PDR):
1. Duplex ground fault interrupter receptacle(s) will be provided by the UV
Manufacturer.
2. Receptacles will be mounted in an individual, impact resistant thermoplastic
junction box complete with a Type 3R rain shield for outdoor installation.
Contractor to supply appropriate 120 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz circuit to power the
PDRs which have a total current draw of approximately 4.9 amps. Contractor to
be responsible for distributing the power from the main 120 Volt feed to the
individual PDRs. Responsibility to be all encompassing and in accordance with
the local electrical codes.
L. Transition Connections
1. One (1) inlet and One (1) outlet transition box(es) will be supplied.
2. The material of construction for the transition boxes will be stainless steel
type 304, 14 gauge.
3. Openings on the transition boxes (for flange connections) conform to ANSI
standards and have dimensions as shown on the Contract Drawings.
4. One (1) Turnbox constructed of stainless-steel type 304, 14 gauge will be
June 2021 Project#21.00317 466600—Page 6

supplied as per contract drawings
M. Maintenance Rack:
1. One (1) Type 304 stainless steel maintenance rack(s)will be supplied. The
rack is designed to hold UV modules during service or maintenance.
N. Spare Parts:
1. The following additional parts will be furnished:
• Four UV lamps (per bank)
• Four Quartz sleeves (per bank)
• Four Lamp holder seals (per bank)
• One Operators Kit (including face shield, gloves) (per bank)
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. In accordance with shop drawings, and Manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S SERVICES
A. Start-up, field testing and Operator Training: 1 full day on site.
B. Warranty Service: As required during the warranty period.
END OF SECTION 466600
June 2021 Project#21.00317 466600—Page 7